Home

EMS SQL Backup Administration console

Contents

1. A Update Statistics step editor Update DB statistics vme cm Name amp description me ta PIE HumanResources ADDR A General we VE HumanResources ADDR El fg Selection ME ka sqlexpress Objects By List VE HumanResources Depart ME aschel sqi2008 MES HumanResources Emplo Tables and Views v FE HumanResources Emplo E These databases vE HumanResources Emplo FE master VER HumanResources Emplo SG model VIE HumanResources EMPLO FE msdb VES THumanResources JobCa na DES Peru SH M Demons MES Person Address MG hr DEJ Person AddressT ype IG LargeDB us Marcon Cantat a MA orphaned E These views a MS test Eleg Sales vindividualDemogr m 8 ves aes HumanResources vJobC Ae xtraLargeDB rales HumanResources vJobC F2 h HumanResources vJobC 4h Production vProductAnd ay Production vProductMod El Production vProductMod ox _ cae Hp Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode It is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy Databases and objects All Use this option to select both system and user objects All system This option indicates tha
2. Backup provider You need to select the provider that had been used for creating the backup Depending on the selection the restore procedure will be performed by EMS SQL Backup or SQL Server means Backup Source History shows the list of the available database backups for the specified server and database Only backups of corresponding provider types are displayed Files allows selecting individual backup files from the server Server Select the server to restore database from Database This option is available for History backup source and contains databases available for the selected server Choose the database you need to restore and the list of the backups available for the selected database will be displayed below You need to select the backup to restore and proceed to the next step of the wizard 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 213 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual In the Storage column you can view cloud storages where the backup has been uploaded If it is not found locally you will be able to search for it in the cloud storage and then download it When restoring on the chosen date using the history the search of the needed for restoring full and differential backups is performed For example if you are restoring a transaction log then all backups will be found starting from the full to all transaction log backups All detected backups will be restored sequentially to ensure a
3. Name Specify the name for the connection The connection name must be unique among all that were already created Host address Define the SSH host address Here you can enter server name or its IP address without specifying protocol Port Specify the port the SFTP connection should be executed through Remote folder Define the directory on the SFTP server where backup files will be uploaded If the specified directory does not exist on the server it will be created on the first upload process Set the authentication parameters for uploading backup files to the specified SFTP server 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd ss EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Note that the specified user should have sufficient rights to write to the target folder Provide User name and Password in the corresponding fields Proxy Select the proxy through which the connection to the SFTP server will be established The possible values are e Socks 4 e Socks 5 e HTTP If you have selected to connect through proxy to SFTP you need to configure the following proxy settings Server Port User name and Password Timeout Specify the timeout in seconds when a connection will be timed out because of inactivity on the data channel You can check the access to the specified folder by clicking the Test button You will be offered to select servers over which the connection should be checked If the specified r
4. This may take a few minutes please wait PE Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel To configure connection parameters for performing deactivation see the Proxy tab of the Options dialog After the process of online deactivation you will automatically proceed to the next step of the wizard 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 31 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 5 2 4 Completing operation This step is intended to inform you about the product deactivation status Ee 7 ct D J LL x Product license deactivation process Step 3 of 3 Verify the process result Product deactivation Deactivation Succeed Local deactivation Succeed UFRRNDQtMzBBMIY tROSONTKtQUSPTK4tVU 1GRDAtN IBUWFUtODc3NEUtWIhLU 1ItREhFU 1 Deactivation Code MKQkMz OTM5NDQwMDAwMDAwMCOyQzQ2Csp 7 xA 7X 2VrfPeXRLOOBMucJh4 Click the Finish button to complete the operation 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 32 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 53 License Manager License Manager allows you to view license information of all servers in EMS SQL Backup which have EMS SQL Backup server components installed Using this tool you can quickly reactivate license keys on all instances To launch License Manager select the License Manager item of the Gears menu The list contains all currently connected servers To view license information of all servers regi
5. 4h Production vProductAndDescription Ch Production vProductModelCatalogDescription amp Production vProductModelinstructions a Sales vSalesPerson E ay Sales vSalesPersonSalesByFiscalYears 44 Person vStateProvinceCountryRegion amp Purchasing vvendor lt Back Next gt Finish Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode Databases and objects Select objects to reorganize indexes All Use this option to select both system and user objects All system This option indicates that only system objects should be selected All user Select this option to select user objects only 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 251 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual By mask This option allows defining objects selection by mask Use for a set of any characters and for any single character in the object name By list This option allows you to select objects manually If you are creating a step in a policy template then you are able to enter databases tables and views manually Databases These databases 8 AdventureWorks 9 TestDB These views ns x D e Use the button or Ins key to define database table view name After you cli
6. 5 Clouds Backup provider Backup provider set in the Backup database wizard This option cannot be changed in editing mode The files created with EMS SQL Backup provider cannot be restored using standard server tools you need either use EMS SQL Backup restore or convert the backup file to SQL Server type 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 305 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 1 3 Selection This page allows you to edit database selection for backup operation W Backup Database step editor Backup system DB Ss Select a page F Name amp description a ma BR General eee iB Servers Databases By List x i FE ka 5 Database differential FI kalsqlexpress M These databases F amp SQL Backup settings ne 78 VIE master a Backup fle options Remove inactive entries e aschel sql2008 ai 8 von A Verify options Meer Clouds Leave in restoring state B AdventureWorks Copy only MG Demods MG hr ME Large 18 orphaned TEST B ves ME xtratargeDB Backup type Use this parameter to define the backup type Database full a full database backup which backs up the entire database including the transaction log Database differential a differential backup which records only the changes made to the data in the database after the last full database backup Transaction log a sequence of log backups provided for a continuous chain of transa
7. Backup Database Restore Database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Shrink Database Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 23 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 13 1 Naming step You can name the step using the Name field The Description field can be used to define brief info for the created step Set step name and description Step 1 of 5 The Database Shipping step manages creating of full database backups on the source server and their restoring on destination server via shipping to the network share folder The wizard will guide you through the process of selecting databases and setting up shipping options Name Database Shipping step 1 Description Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 24 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 13 2 Specifying database pairs At this step you need to set database pairs for database shipping ff Database Shipping step wizard Database Shipping step 1 i Specify database pairs Step 2 of 5 Source server Destination server doom_server tserv2005 x olivia v Source DB Destination DB New database AdventureWorks lt None gt DemoDB lt Create new gt DemoDB hr l
8. Builds Config Msi Cvs v Location C Backups local ox J canei Hep This dialog is opened on selecting server backups folder in Backup settings tab of the Server side components properties dialog Setting file options step of the Backup Database wizard and Backup file options tab of the Backup database step editor Selecting available backup step of the Restore Database wizard Specifying backup source step of the Get backup to console wizard Selecting files folders for cleanup step of the Maintenance Cleanup wizard and Selection tab of the Maintenance Cleanup step editor Specifying backup options and Specifying folders and recovery options steps of the Transaction Log Shipping wizard and General tab of the Transaction Log Shipping step editor 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 425 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Credits Software Developers Alexey Butalov Nicolay Sezganov Alexander Paklin Andrey Kudryashov Nikita Konuchenko Technical Writers Olga Radchenko Tatyana Ovsyannik ova Cover Designer Tatyana Mak urova Translators Anna Shulkina Serge Fominikh Team Coordinators Nicolay Sezganov Alexander Chelyadin Roman Tkachenko 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd
9. Click Finish to create step item Step 4 of 4 Verify the choices made in the wizard Step Name Database Integrity Check step 1 Kind Database Integrity Check step Database selection doom_server tserv2005 Select Databases AdventureWorks hr LargeDB DemoDB Checking options Indude indices Yes Exdusive access Snapshot Limited Checking Physical Only All error messages No Suppress info messages No After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Finish button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 28 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 7 Reorganize Indices Reorganize Indices step allows you to perform index management operations in your databases reorganizing rebuilding disabling the ALTER INDEX REORGANIZE REBUILD DISABLE Transact SQL statements are issued When indexes have pages in which the logical ordering based on the key value does not match the physical ordering inside the data file these indexes are called fragmented Highly fragmented indexes may considerably decrease query performance Index fragmentation is remedied by either reorganizing or by rebuilding an index To launch the reorganization of indexes immediately select Quick Maintenance Actions Reorganize Indices popup menu item in the Servers tab To perform scheduled backup on regular basis you need to include this t
10. Log Shipping step 1 Select a page Backup folder backup_root_folder server Check Name amp description Max Thread Count 25 Ta Selection V Compression Compression Level 2 5 Encryption Encryption Password Confirm Password Encryption Type rijndael Network shared folder ka shared check Destination folder C Backups check Recovery options No recovery leaves database in the restoring state Standby leaves database in read only and standby mode Undo file name Kill connections to destination database Note backup_root_folder can be configured in the Server side Components Properties dialog x J caei He Backup folder Specify the directory for backup It is set relatively the source server You can check availability of this folder by clicking the corresponding button Max Thread Count Indicates the number of threads to be used for backup operation Increase the number of threads for faster speed If you are using a multi processor system increasing this value can fasten backup speed You are recommended to set one thread fewer than the number of processors W Compression 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 366 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Enable the option to compress backup Compression Level Defines backup file compression level Use 1 for best speed and 4 for best compression W Encryption Enable the option to encr
11. open a previously saved report save the current report to an external prnx file start printing the report open page setup dialog set scaling options enable disable hand tool adjust zoom options navigate within the printing report pages set the number of pages displayed in the window set report background and watermark export the content to any of the available formats PDF file HTML file MHT file RTF file Excel file CSV file Text file Image file and then send it via E mail close the Preview window 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd na EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 Policies This chapter provides you with necessary information concerning SQL Server maintenance policies Policy in EMS SQL Backup is a set of scheduled tasks to be performed on the servers or databases each containing a number of steps Policy is implemented as a set of jobs in SQL Server and therefore its execution requires consistent work of SQL Agent You can schedule one or more tasks to be executed according to the preset schedules The policy can perform operations on a set of databases on different servers It can be created for a server as well as for a Group of servers or Solution To assign it automatically on policy creation you should run Policy wizard using the context menu of the corresponding elements server group or solution Each Policy execution generates the result s
12. varbinary max and xm data 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 7 3 Selection This page allows you to edit object selection for indices reorganization fe EE 4 Reorganize Indices step editor Reorganize DB indices Se cm F Name amp description me ka PE HumanResources ADDRESSTYPE E General DE kalsgexpress VEJ lHumanResources Department we Objects By List ZEB HumanResources Employee Rebuild options aschel sql2008 7E HumanResources EmployeeAd Tables and Views v F4 EE HumanResources EmployeeDe E These databases PIE HumanResources EmployeePa MG master MEJ HumanResources EMPLOYEES ME model MER HumanResources JobCandidate TE msdb MEJ HumanResources Shift MS CELTES DE Person Address z EE DemoDB E These views 6 hr hl DINFORMATION_SCHEMA VIEW MG LargeDB D sys views EJE orphaned M4 ONFORMATION_SCHEMA VIEWS me test h Sales vindividualCustomer me ves ME Sales vindividualDemographics ME xtralargeDB HumanResources vJobCandida W Ex HumanResources vJobCandida v ES HumanResources vJobCandida z RAL MDradirtinnl fudeadiictAndMeccri a a Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name i
13. SQL Manager net EMS Database Management Solutions zm EMS SQL Backup User s Manual HS 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd ELB BOL Cumps as oftectne toot tor materrating beriag entire it bag ecg tte oe at SOL nerves peer Company D maton La BLEUS Metab age ot ther tne bet oor pe me rade viel ain EMS SQL Backup User s Manual 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd All rights reserved This manual documents EMS SQL Backup No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording taping or information storage and retrieval systems without the written permission of the publisher Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and or registered trademarks of the respective owners The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompanyit In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for anyloss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document Use of this documentation is subject to the following te
14. User manual 7 1 4 4 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start T SQL statement execution G Execute T SQL Statement step wizard Execute T SQL Statement step r Ta Click Finish to create step item Step 4 of 4 Verify the choices made in the wizard Step Name Execute T SQL Statement step 1 Kind Execute T SQL Statement step Server selection ka 192 168 66 53 deimos sql2012 Options Timeout 5S sec Sql syntax checked Yes After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Finish button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 235 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 5 History Cleanup History Cleanup step allows you to clean the selected instance history backup history and SQL Agent jobs To launch history cleanup immediately select Quick Maintenance Action 93 History Cleanup popup menu item in the Servers tab To perform scheduled history cleaning on regular basis you need to include this task into Policy 1 At Step 2 of the Create Policy wizard click Create new step button and select History Cleanup step type 2 Also you can create a new Step Template for further use selecting History Cleanup step at the Templates tab Steps of the History Cleanup wizard Naming template Selecting server Selecting hist
15. close EMS SQL Backup application if it is running e repeat the steps you have made for the first time installation run EMS SQL Backup using its shortcut in the corresponding group of Windows Start menu Note There is an installation mode that allows installing server components on local servers without installing EMS SQL Backup Console This mode should be used when a remote installation of server components from EMS SQL Backup Console is impossible due to some reasons but at the same time the installation package can be copied to a server and run there To run the server side components installation using the Stand alone remote components Installer choose the Server side only on the third step of the installation wizard See also EMS SQL Backup FAQ 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 16 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 4 Purchasing To make it easier for you to purchase our products we have contracted with share it registration service The share it order process is protected via a secure connection and makes on line ordering by credit debit card quick and safe The following information about share it is provided for your convenience Share it is a global e commerce provider for software and shareware sales via the Internet Share it accepts payments in US Dollars Euros Pounds Sterling Japanese Yen Australian Dollars Canadian Dollars or Swiss Franks by Credit Card Visa M
16. lt Back next gt mih a The options below allow you to define conditions which EMS SQL Backup should perform logging by x No backup Enable this option to log the list of databases with no backup WI Last full backup The option should be used to log the list of databases with old full backups Last full backup older than Defines the time point relatively to current date The list of databases with full backup made before this point will be logged W Last log backup Use this option to log the list of databases with old log backups Last log backup older than Define the time point relatively to current date The list of databases with log backup 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 274 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual made before this point will be logged 7 Index fragmentation Enable this option to log the list of databases with high fragmentation Index fragmentation more than Define the level of index fragmentation Databases list with index fragmentation level above specified will be added to log Only check indices with more than This option indicates that only indices with page amount above specified will be checked WI Integrity check SQL Server 2005 or higher Enable this option to log the list of databases with out of date integrity check Last integrity check older than Define the time point relatively to current date The list of databases with in
17. Copy Paste a Add New Step to the task a Add Step from Template create a step based on the existing step template Za Edit Step using the Step editor J Remove Step from the task g Expand all tasks t Collapse all tasks Copy the selected step es Cut the selected step 1 Paste the copied cut step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 120 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 1 4 Schedule context menu The following actions can be applied to the schedule Add Schedule Add Schedule from Template Edit Schedule Remove Schedule N amp Expand All Collapse All Fe A Copy de Cut 3 Paste 8 Add New Schedule to the task a Add Schedule from Template create a schedule based on the existing step template 3 Edit Schedule using the Step editor 8 Remove Schedule from the task g Expand all tasks t Collapse all tasks Copy the selected schedule Cut the selected schedule 1 Paste the copied cut schedule 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 121 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 1 5 Server context menu The following actions can be applied to the server on which the policy is deployed Remove Server from Step ie Expand All Collapse All Show History Remove server from Step g Expand all tasks Collapse all tasks Z Show History open Policy history viewer Note
18. Encryption password Max thread count Split Clouds 1 C angel_backups 2 aschel EMS SQL Backup backup_root_folder server server _ database _ backup_type _ date bkp Full Yes Yes Yes Yes No 4 Rijndael xxxxxxxxxxx 5 By Database C angel_backups with WinAuth ftp tester aschel 29 m he After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Finish button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 211 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 2 Restore Database Restore Database Wizard allows you to perform the database restore operation on your SQL Server system The wizard provides flexible customization and is easy to use Using this wizard you can restore backup files stored locally on the server as long as the backups stored on the remote cloud storage Restore operation is used to rebuild a damaged or corrupted database that has been backed up using Backup Database Wizard You can restore the entire database part of a database transaction logs To start the operation use the A Quick Maintenance Action Restore Database item of the server database popup menu or the Restore Database item of the database context menu This wizard will guide you through the restore database process step by step Note This step cannot be included into Policies It can be only launched manu
19. In order to create a template based on a step open the policy it is included in and select the l Copy to Templates step context menu item or use the corresponding button In the dialog appeared enter a Template name and define whether databases selected in the step should be saved in the template being created Eg Conversion to Template Convert Step Database Parameters Logger step 1 to Template Template name Database Parameters Logger ok canei _ Hep This template will be automatically added to the Step templates list 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 179 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 4 Schedule template The Schedule Templates section allows you to manage Schedule Templates To launch policy you can use the local time on each server or the local console time re EG EMS SQL Backup Administration Console boa boa ih Servers Policies Templates Activities Templates Schedule Templates View Name Description E H Preset templates Templates provided by EMS gt Policy Templates Saturday night at 10 Schedule with Recurring weekly timing plan Task Templates Sunday night at 4 o clock Schedule with Recurring weekly timing plan 2 Step Templates Q First Sunday of month Schedule with Relative monthly recurrence timing plan Schedule Templates H Custom templates Create your own tempales or done and change pres
20. L Preview ts HS Go id Ly BSP ALS 100 Le amp gt MIE M Bliarar File View Background m l Policy name System databases maintenance Server name ka Backup DB Rs 10 02 2014 11 02 32 10 02 2014 11 02 36 DB integrity check 10 02 2014 11 00 00 10 02 2014 11 00 01 10 02 2014 11 00 07 10 02 2014 10 30 00 10 02 2014 10 30 01 10 02 2014 10 00 01 10 02 2014 10 00 28 09 02 2014 23 30 00 09 02 2014 23 30 00 09 02 2014 23 30 01 Backup DB 09 02 2014 23 10 00 09 02 2014 23 10 01 09 02 2014 23 10 04 Success i v Current Page 1 Total Pages 4 Zoom Factor 100 This report can be viewed when a single server is selected in the explorer and a policy deployed on this server is selected in the Policies area If a policy deployed on several servers is selected in Policies area a report will include information on launches of this policy only on the selected server The report displays brief information on tasks of the selected policy including task name planned start time started time finished and task status e Multi server report 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd m EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual E Eile View Background 14 gt D P Blanda iO a ale 8 AI A amp 100 x amp Planned stat Starea Finished sams Backup DB 11 02 2014 15 10 00 11 02 2014 15 10 00 11 02 2014 15 10 06 Success doom_server tserv2005 11 02
21. Ltd Ea EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Transaction Log Shipping Name and description G n ralistes annee A ARR rene been SAN eee Aa pend Eten ne aes ern nt ent nuire Selection MERE nr nes cok sobs re td Ne Am ed zoos Sobel sc bet on bas ce en le Ne nid a ne ee Database Shipping Name and description inerte nine date cane cuss ausen sachs pinven fends evepucedetweasstivedshitekern dead ne dns dcdeesareantiventeni voted G n raliste in ae tasks ia ee ANR iden dents Rene Ne ARR PA in RAR ire S ICCIION nee TTT A AE E tcahsestazcscedvaed tens carstasetsh ire net A Part VIII Gears menu Switch Save configuration OPTIONS sie va fetes ves A T race nn n ves ceece esse nn T lt qesesteccetaasicccsavasqetuesercecseeccenteeess Generale E A nil a en E men sens Peel ea Dog E nes russe non de Data refreshing Cloud Connections 2 28 58 ra aaaeeeaa Toeka cunt auc Sect sud naw nl der oem et eds deb en edf scuusdecvacuesuvsdeveecseteeteed 385 SMB CIFS Connection ss attrait nette ian Re en Hie end tenant 387 FIR CONNECTION VEN EE nick A Ne N A ARS A AE QAR enr AON DA RS CN AR 388 Amazon S3 Cloud Connectiony vce cerca cetacean e aaea inner min 390 Secure FTP Connection Microsoft AZure ClOUG sirun nn tenant mnt Nada net MR tn PROXY E e EE near E re een recense at dagdstvesuocsdedncudgdadendvadsailvass at uen ananas an Agent ans dede tels notons en dass use Cou ne inde Part IX How to Install EMS SQL Back
22. Network Folder tio Network Folder settings Remote resource ADMINS Custom Share path Shared Share local path C Shared Windows authentication This account Help lt Back Next gt Install Cancel If you are installing server side components on the local server then on the first step the server name is displayed For a remote server choose the way the service will be installed SQL Server Install server side components via SQL Server connection It is recommended to use the SQL Server option if the SQL Server service is running under the account with Administrator privileges or LocalSystem account Network Folder Install server side components via Network shared folder Remote resource 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Select the shared folder that will be used for copying files that are necessary for installing EMS SQL Backup server side components ADMIN or Custom Use the Custom share folder if the ADMIN share does not exist on the remote host For the Custom share you need to specify the following settings Share path Specify the share folder name only without providing its full path for example Shared Share local path Specify the full local path to the shared folder on the remote host for example C Shared Specify the authentication credentials to be used for connection to th
23. Select a page Name amp description B General E Servers Notify me doom_server tserv2005 The notification options specified will be applied to all service tasks within this policy When the policy fails x as sgmanager net Warning Email settings aren t defined for this server To use notification you have to define Email settings in Service Properties dialog Check the necessary servers in the Servers list to send notifications about policy launch results In the Send email field specify the trigger action When the policy succeeds send the message when policy has been successfully launched When the policy fails send the message when policy launch has failed When the policy complete send the message when policy tasks have been completed Input the recipient email address in the Send to field Note Email agent options should be set for the service at Server side components properties 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 137 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 44 Maintenance plan conversion This wizard is intended for converting linear Maintenance Plans created in SQL Server Management Studio to Policies of EMS SQL Backup NB You need to have SQL Server Integration Services installed on the server to perform this conversion Note We recommend to disable Maintenance Plans in SQL Server Management Studio after conversion to avo
24. The single server cannot be removed from the step Instead you can remove the whole step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 122 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 2 Policy wizard This chapter explains how to create a new policy in EMS SQL Backup There is a special wizard that guides you through the policy creation process You can launch this wizard in one of the following ways At the Policies tab E Use the Create New Policy or Create Policy from Template popup menu item At the Servers tab o Right click database server server group and use the l Maintenance Policies Create new policy or Create from templates item If you call the wizard from the Policies page you will be asked to pick a server group or solution which policy will be created for You can create a policy for all servers within Group or Solution Ee Select servers for policy cl Groups local 19 ka td ka salexpress remote 19 doom_server tserv2005 aschel sql2008 Solutions Solution 1 4 ka td doom_server tserv2005 Databases 4 AdventureWorks 9 DemoDB Note Creating a Policy for a database means creating policy for the server on which database is stored This database will be marked by default in steps that require database selection Note When you create a policy from a template it will be applied to all databases of the server irrespective of the dat
25. There is a set of predefined policies tasks steps and schedules in EMS SQL Backup that can be used for rapid maintenance policy creation All predefined templates with descriptions can be found on the Templates tab In order to add a predefined task to a policy you need to proceed to the second step of the Policy wizard select the Tasks section click the La Create New from Template button and select the needed task template In order to add a predefined step to a task in a policy you need to proceed to the second step of the Policy wizard select the Steps section click the La Create New from Template button and select the needed step template In order to add a predefined schedule to a task in a policy you need to proceed to the second step of the Policy wizard select the Schedules section click the La Create New from Template button and select the needed schedule template 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 45 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 7 Configure transaction log shipping To configure transaction log shipping from one server to another you need to create a policy with a Transaction Log Shipping step On the second step of the Transaction Log Shipping wizard you need to set pairs of databases for transaction log shipping The destination database must be the restored copy of the source database and be in Restoring state Otherwise use the Overwrite to rewrite database
26. W Verify only RESTORE VERIFYONLY Check this option to enable selected backup set verification Verifying a backup checks that the backup is intact physically to ensure that all the files in the backup are readable and can be restored and that you can restore your backup in the event you need to use it If the New database option is selected then database name should be specified in the corresponding field If you are restoring a database from the differential copy the New database option is unavailable Restore Database step wizard Quick Restore Database step x Define the target database parameters Step 2 of 4 Restore as Existing database 9 Database name AdventureWorks X New database New database name File Group Logic Name Physical File Name te PRIMARY C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 12 SQL 20 14 MSSQL DATA ey AdventureWorks_Data AdventureWorks mdf te Logs C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 12 SQL2014 MSSQL DATA RH AdventureWorks_Log AdventureWorks ldf Help lt Back Next gt Run Cancel 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual The grid displays logical and physical names of the files You can rename the files and groups in the grid or change file folder in the appropriate dialog clicking the ellipsis button Use the ual ellipsis button to set files for the database tha
27. gt 2 Shrink DB ES 2 Reorganize DB indices Update DB statistics FA os 2 el V Terminate task on step fail mm Description Shrinks the size of the data files in the databases Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel a Create new step create a new step You will be prompted to select Step type in the dialog and proceed to the Create step wizard Create step from template create step from the template The list of step templates will be open in this case allowing you to select any of the available templates and create a step based on its settings If you select several step templates the corresponding number of steps will be created 2 Edit step change step settings a Delete step remove the step e Copy step to templates create a template based on the selected step You can view each step Description if any in the corresponding field Use a and Le buttons to reorder Steps 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 168 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual v Terminate task on step fail If this option is checked then the execution of a whole task is aborted as a result of one of the steps fail lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 169 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 2 1 3 Define schedule for service task At this step you need to set schedule s to be used for task la
28. gt i L Edit amp Add New Template Ctri Insert La Delete L Edit Template Order L Delete Template Ctrl Delete Move Up Transfer cp Move Down Export of Import g Export Template F Clone Cf Import Template C Clone Template Ea Processes 0 You can manage step templates using the buttons on the Toolbars or popup menu Add New Template Ctri Insert launches the wizard for creating a new step template 2 Edit Template opens the step template editor Delete Template Ctr Delete removes the template EP Export Template Fi Import Template C Clone Template create a copy of the selected template How to create a step based on the template When you are prompted to create a step on policy creation or task creation click the Create Step from Template button and select the template or several templates at once fromthe list 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 177 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual See also Policy templates Task templates Schedule template 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 178 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 3 1 Creating template from step If you already have a configured maintenance action included in a policy you can create a template on its basis which can be later used for creating a new step All parameters that have been defined during the step creation will be saved in this template
29. me olivia ME aschel sal2014 w le e Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode It is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy Use aaa file or folder specification to add a cleanup destination and Edit specification M remove selected specification for appropriate actions Cleanup specification In this dialog you can define locations or files to be cleared on the server or cloud storage 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 361 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Eo Define items to clear rx Location Server Cloud storage Provider EMS SQL Backup MS SOL Server Xcessssesssecctsesavsrconseenssesnse Folder C Backups T Extension bak Indude first4evel subfolders File type Backups Za Location Select Server if you want to clear folders files stored on your server locally Select Cloud storage if you want to delete files located on the cloud Server Provider Select whether the files created by EMS SQL Backup or SQL Server will be cleaned Folder Set the search folder for the files The path is set relatively to the server which you selected in the Server list If the MS SQL Server has been selec
30. standard maintenance plans of SQL Server Can different types of maintenance tasks go in the same policy Can policy tasks have their own execution schedules Can EMS SQL Backup perform a single maintenance task without creating policies Can I execute multiple policies simultaneously on one server I have setup SOL Server maintenance plans Can I use them in EMS SQL Backup How does EMS SOL Backup notify about a policy execution failure Can I monitor manage my set of servers using two three different installed on different computers consoles e Whether the servers EMS SQL Backup works with must be located within one local network e Do I need to open any additional ports or to enable protocols for working with EMS SOL Backup e Can I install EMS SQL Backup server components remotely e I failed to install server components remotely from EMS SQL Backup Console due to insufficient privileges or errors on installation Can I run the installation wizard on the server machine to install server components e What kind of account should be used for running EMS SQL Backup service e Policy execution failed with the error The task cannot be completed The owner NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM of SqlBackup XXXXXXXX_ Task does not have access to server Why does it happen e What are the differences between different versions of EMS SQL Backup e May I not pay the program maintenance e I get the Access is denied error on trying to install
31. 2014 15 10 00 11 02 2014 15 10 00 11 02 2014 15 10 02 DB integrity check 11 02 2014 15 00 00 11 02 2014 15 00 00 11 02 2014 15 00 13 Success ka f 02 2014 15 00 00 11 02 2014 15 00 00 11 02 2014 15 00 13 Success doom _serveritserv2005 11 02 2014 15 00 00 11 02 2014 15 00 00 11 02 2014 15 00 03 x i Current Page 1 Total Pages 12 Zoom Factor 100 Multi server report is available when a policy deployed on multiple servers is selected in the Policies area Besides a group or a solution must be selected in the Servers area The report displays brief information on tasks of the selected policy including task name server name planned start time started time finished and task status e Detailed task report File View Background l Ol dG SC WI A S ow TEE E a Policy name System databases maintenance Server name ka Taskmame DB integrity check DB integrity check 10 02 2014 11 00 00 10 02 2014 11 00 01 10 02 2014 11 00 07 Success System DB integrity check Success 10 02 2014 11 00 03 10 02 2014 11 00 07 Success 10 02 2014 11 00 05 INF Integrity check for master on local MSSQLSERVER OK 10 02 2014 11 00 05 INF Integrity check for model on Qocal MSSQLSERVER OK 10 02 2014 11 00 07 INF Integrity check for msdb on local MSSQLSERVER OK DB integrity check 10 02 2014 10 00 00 10 02 2014 10 00 01 10 02 2014 10 00 28 Success System DB integrity check Su
32. 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 376 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual restoring Data folder Specify the path for data MDF files for the newly created database Log folder Specify the path for data LDF files for the newly created database Note When creating a template no databases can be selected 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 378 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 8 Gears menu This chapter contains information concerning personalization of the application These tools are accessible via pressing the Gears button located in the left top corner of the EMS SQL Backup window Switch Configuration Save Configuration This group sets options for storing program settings Options This group includes general options data security server refresh log depth and cloud storages See also Getting Started Servers Policies Templates Activities Maintenance Actions 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 379 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 8 1 Switch Save configuration Program settings are stored in XML format You can save them either in a separate XML file or in database table The settings include info concerning server registration policies groups and solutions templates environment options Note We recommend you to make backups of the table with EMS SQL Backup settings XML file is backed up automat
33. 5 Now it is possible to move rename folder for backups specifying new path in service settings Moved backups are handled automatically 6 There was a restriction which prevented adding some databases in the Database Shipping wizard Fixed now 7 Lots of other improvements and fixes Ha Version 1 6 Added the possibility to change the time zone in the EMS SQL Backup Administration Console Daylight saving time using is improved in planning policies time execution Added the possibility to set HTTP proxy for uploading backup files using FTP License Activation and License Deactivaion wizards are improved Other improvements and bug fixes Ha 01 RS U N Version 1 5 Ha The Built In Scheduler is implemented to execute policies on servers without SQL Server Agent for example SQL Server Express The ability to use SQL Server Agent remains 2 The remote and local installation of Server side components is improved and simplified e Possibility to save the settings used for remote setup e Numerous hints messages and validations when setting parameters e Remote install through custom network share in case of absence of ADMIN e Possibility to specify the port for server instance 3 Database Shipping the possibility to ship full database backup from one SQL Server instance to another on schedule More detailed log for Tasks and Steps Now the log contains the source data Improved support of SQL Server 2014 Trial
34. Amazon Web Services account Storage class Select the storage class for uploaded backup files The possible values are e Standard e Reduced Redundancy Protocol Select the protocol that will be used for uploading backups to Amazon S3 The possible values are e HTTP e HTTPS If you have checked the Use proxy option to connect to Amazon S3 you need to configure the following proxy settings Server Port User name and Password Timeout Specify the timeout in seconds when a connection will be timed out because of inactivity on the data channel You can check the access to the specified bucket by clicking the Test button You will be offered to select servers over which the connection should be checked If the specified bucket does not exist it will be created on performing test connection 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 32 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 8 2 3 4 Secure FTP Connection The Secure FTP Connection Settings dialog is provided for configuring SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol server connection for uploading backup files E Secure FTP Connection Settings Ss Name 192 168 66 48 Host address 192 168 66 48 Port 22 El Remote folder backups User name tester Password r Proxy None x Server Port 0K User name Password Timeout 60 sec Test Loc cancel _ iep
35. Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 6 2 Selecting databases Use this step of the wizard to select databases for integrity check Database Integrity Check step wizard Database Integrity Check step 1 Define database selection for servers Step 2 of 4 E Servers Databases T re aschel sql2008 i These databases Ae i m8 master g hr E model By Mask EE dean_winxp sql2008r2 msdb Eri e 192 168 66 53 VE AdventureWorks T MO olivia M8 hr aschel sql2014 715 Largeds 6 orphaned Test M6 ves G xtraLargeDB lt Back Next gt Finish Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode Databases All Use this option to select both system and user databases All system This option indicates that only system databases should be checked All user Select this option to check user databases only 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual By mask This option allows defining database selection by mask Use for a set of any characters and for any single character in the database name By list This option allows you
36. Compression level 2 Restore options Recovery RECOVERY After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Finish button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd sn EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 Editing Steps This chapter describes the way steps can be viewed edited After the step has been already created it can be opened and edited in the editor at Policies tab if it s already a part of a policy or Templates tab if it s been created as a template To open a step editor use double clicking popup menu or the Edit button Topics listed below provide sufficient information about step editing Backup database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement Database Integrity Check Shrink Database Reorganize Indices Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup History Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping See also Creating Steps 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 302 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 1 Backup database Backup Database step editor provides the same set of options as Backup Database wizard The following pages are available in this dialog Name_and description General Selection EMS SQL Backup settings Backup file options Options Verify options See also Execute SOL Server Agent job Execu
37. Encryption Type Select the encryption algorithm lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 12 4 Specifying folders and recovery options At this step you need to set shared and destination folder and recovery options for the transaction log restore amp Log Shipping step wizard Log Shipping step 1 lt n Specify shared and destination folder recovery options Step 4 of 5 Network shared folder _ ka shared _ k check Destination folder C Backups Check Recovery options No recovery leaves database in the restoring state Standby leaves database in read only and standby mode Undo file name Kill connections to destination database Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Network shared folder Specify the backup shared folder for copying transaction log backups of the source database Both source and destination servers should have access to this folder otherwise log shipping cannot be performed Click the Check button to make sure that the folder is accessible by both servers Destination folder Specify the destination server folder where backups will be shipped to This folder is set relatively to the destination server Recovery options This group of options allows you to specify the recovery options to be applied to the restore operation The desti
38. Excel and other popular formats to database tables via user friendly wizard interface Data Pump for PostgreSQL Migrate from most popular databases MySQL SQL Server Oracle DB2 InterBase Firebird etc to PostgreSQL Data Generator for PostgreSQL Generate test data for database testing purposes in a simple and direct way Wide range of data generation parameters DB Comparer for PostgreSQL Compare and synchronize the structure of your databases Move changes on your development database to production with ease w A mw dd ad B DB Extract for PostgreSQL Create database backups in the form of SQL scripts save your database structure and table data as a whole or partially SQL Query for PostgreSQL Analyze and retrieve your data build your queries visually work with query plans build charts based on retrieved data quickly and more amp Data Comparer for PostgreSQL lt Compare and synchronize the contents of your databases Automate your data migrations from development to production database al L Scroll to top InterBase Firebird 89 SQL Management Studio for InterBase Firebird EMS SQL Management Studio for InterBase and Firebird is a complete solution for database administration and development SQL Studio unites the must have tools in one powerful and easy to use environment that will make you more productive than ever before Ei SQL Manager for InterBase Firebird Simplify and automate your
39. If SQL DMO components are not installed the NetServerEnum function from netapi32 dll is used If neither SQL DMO components nor netapi32 dil are installed the Server name drop down list will be empty when the program is launched for the first time and filled with host names already registered in the program during further launches Please note that if Microsoft SQL Server is installed as a named instance you should input instance name in the Server name field in the following format computer_name sqlserver_instance_name or ip_address sqlserver_instance_name e g MY COMPUT ER SQLEXPRESS 127 0 0 1 SQLEXPRESS Note If a server name cannot be found automatically type in its name in the field Select Authentication type to be used for the connection Windows Authentication or SQL Server authentication and set user name and password correspondingly Connection timeout Set timeout limit in seconds for establishing connection to the server Database Name Select the database name for loading saving the configuration from the drop down menu Test Connection Check whether the connection is established successfully Schema is a database schema for configuration table that will store logs and policy table names Options Table Name EMS SQL Backup policies will be stored in this table Switch to Saved Configuration Enable this option to move current configuration to another location and apply it otherwise configur
40. Management Solutions Ltd 375 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 12 3 Selection This page allows you to edit database selection to ship full database backups 4 Database Shipping step editor Database Shipping step 1 x Select a page G jne Ai Source server Destination server a General doom_server tserv2005 x olivia v fg Selection Source DB Destination DB New database AdventureWorks AdventureWorks DemoDB lt None gt hr lt None gt CES lt gt B orphaned lt None gt rest TestDB AdventureWorks new_db vcs xtraLargeDB lt None gt Data folder C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 11 MSSQLSERVER M Log folder C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 11 MSSQLSERVER M x J cae He _ Source server Select the server where the database that you want to back up to another server is located Destination server Select the server where database backups are shipped to from the Destination server list Set the database pairs in the grid The full database backups are performed on the source server and restored on the destination server If the destination database does not exist you can select lt Create new gt item in the Destination DB column and specify its name in the New database column Creating the databases is performed by creating a full backup of the source database and its further 1999
41. SQL Backup performs log shipping using its compression and encryption features which make this process faster and more secure Q Ihave servers in different time zones At what time zone will tasks be launched 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual A When creating a policy you can select whether a task on servers in different time zones is launched at servers standard time or simultaneously against the console time This option is called Task Scheduling in different time zones at Step 1 of the Policy Wizard Q What is the advantage of using the Policy Engine of EMS SQL Backup compared to standard maintenance plans of SQL Server A EMS SQL Backup Policy Engine provides the following features v Using EMS SQL Backup backup functionality v Ability to deploy and monitor policies on multiple servers of different versions simultaneously v Easy to use policy monitoring mechanism v Ability to use templates Q Can different types of maintenance tasks go in the same policy A A policy can contain both multiple tasks of different types and multiple tasks of the same type Q Can policy tasks have their own execution schedules A Yes each task can have one or more schedules Q Can EMS SQL Backup perform a single maintenance task without creating policies A Yes you can perform a maintenance task using the Quick Maintenance Actions context menu item of the Serv
42. Test address Click the button to send a test email to the recipient to ensure your settings have been correct correctly 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 12 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 8 3 Log storage settings At this tab you need to configure settings of EMS SQL Backup log storage for the server Log file stores information about user tasks and policies launches Depending on the configured values you will receive warning notification message that Log size is exceeded appearing on server refresh Also this message will be displaying in the server overview information until you perform history cleanup operation A Server side Components Properties Sx Select a page Store tasks log records for 64 days yy SQL Server connection info a Emai settings Store backups log records for 64 21 days Store logs up to 3328 Mb of data l Backup settings Note If the log file size reaches this specified value then both tasks and backups log records are truncated Store tasks log records Set the period of time in days within witch records about tasks launches should be stored in log file All records that are older this specified value will be removed automatically Store backups log records Set the period of time in days within witch records about backups should be stored in log file All records that are older this specified value will be rem
43. a Delete Click this button to remove the object from the policy 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 135 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Copy to templates Select the required object in the list and click this button to add it to templates Use 4 and iv buttons to reorder Tasks Steps and Schedules Use the following buttons for quick copying and moving objects within the policy copy the selected object cut the selected object paste the copied cut object When you create a new object from the template the following Templates list dialog is open You need to check the item s you need to add and click the OK button Select step template s to apply Name Description Checks the allocation structural and logical integrity of all the objects in the database V Reorganize DB indices Reorganizes one or more indices for a table in the databases ig Shrinks the size of the data files in the databases Updates information about the distribution of key values in the database tables Backs up transaction log DB integrity check Backup transaction log 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 136 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 3 3 Notification The Notifications section allows you to view and edit notification parameters Sa Policy editor System databases maintenance x
44. a solution e create a template based on this policy without saving selected databases by choosing the Create Template from Policy its context menu item e create a policy based on this template on the created solution by using the Maintenance Policies Create from Templates solution context menu item 2 If a policy includes several tasks steps then it is recommended to open every step editor and check needed databases servers on a Selection tab 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd so EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 12 Reveal a reason of a failed policy execution If a server has at least one policy with status Failed then the server status contains Policies have problems message To reveal a policy with erroneous execution you need to find a policy with a Failed status in the Policies list This status means that at least one policy task execution was erroneous When you select this policy task in the Policies list the Launches list shows information on all task launches Select a task with a Failed status and click the Show details button in the Message column In the dialog appeared the reason of failed execution will be displayed in the Message field If the problem occurred on policy execution has been resolved you can restore succeeding policy status 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd an EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 13 Res
45. according to specified criteria Maintenance Cleanup Removes obsolete files related to Maintenance plans of SQL Server Management Studio such as reports and database backups Transaction Log Shipping Provides shipping of transaction logs froma source server to a destination one Database Shipping Provides shipping of a database from a source server to a destination one eee fF B amp B BASee EF 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 12 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Step should be included into Policy for scheduled execution To add a Step to Policy you need to specify the Step at Step 2 of the Policy creation wizard at the Policies tab To create a Step Template or add a Step to the Policy or Task template go to the Templates tab See also Editing Steps 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 193 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 1 Backup Database Backup Database step allows you to make a backup copy of one or several databases and transaction log To launch the backup job immediately select Quick Maintenance Actions ga Backup Database popup menu item at the Servers tab To perform scheduled backup on a regular basis you need to include this task into Policy 1 At the Step 2 of the Create Policy wizard click Create new step button and select Backup Database step type 2 Also you can create a new Step Template for furth
46. and it is in process of stopping it Missed the expected time of task execution has passed but no launch of the task was detected Unknown information about task execution cannot be retrieved unless connection the server is set Ignored task status the task was marked as ignored as a result of Problem resolving The overall server status is formed on the basis of policies statuses deployed there If all policies on a server have Success status then the server status is Policies are successful If at least one policy on a server has Warning status then the server status is Policies have warnings If at least one policy on a server has Failed status then the server status is Policies have problems The overall group or solution status is formed on the basis of all policies statuses of servers included into group or solution If all policies of all servers in a group solution have Success status then the group solution status is Policies are successful If at least one policy on at least one server has Warning status then the group solution status is Policies have warnings If at least one policy on at least one server has Failed status then the group solution status is Policies have problems 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 144 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 7 Policy synchronization When you are connecting to a server policies configurations stored on a server and in EMS SQL B
47. are older than specified period of time After this cleanup all information about SQL Server Agent job execution will be removed from the server EMS SQL Backup The following options are intended to delete some log info concerning tasks performed by EMS SQL Backup Backup and restore history data older than Enable the option to clean the history of the backup and restore operations that are older than specified period of time After cleanup the information about EMS SQL Backup type 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 326 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual backups will be removed from EMS SQL Backup vi Log records of Backup older than Enable the option to clean the history of the EMS SQL Backup task s execution that are older than specified period of time After cleanup the information about executed tasks will be removed from History Viewer 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 327 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 4 3 Selection This page allows you to edit servers selection for the operation C3 History Cleanup step editor History Cleanup step 1 ee Sem 5 Name amp description J g Version 10 00 5512 E General WW doom_server tserv2005 Description no description ig seem e re ka sqlexpress Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is graye
48. by that column Time 25 10 2013 18 00 00 25 10 2013 17 58 01 25 10 2013 17 57 41 25 10 2013 17 30 00 alla S g 25 10 2013 17 00 00 25 10 2013 16 30 00 25 10 2013 16 10 00 25 10 2013 16 00 00 25 10 2013 15 30 00 25 10 2013 15 10 00 25 10 2013 15 00 00 25 10 2013 14 30 00 25 10 2013 14 10 00 25 10 2013 14 00 00 25 10 2013 13 30 00 25 10 2013 13 10 00 E 4H IH Et CSN ENS NENENENENENEINE 566666 666 FFT To apply manually defined conditions use the Custom item of the drop down list Show rows where Time son sx And gt sesten e psa E Pick the logical expression from the lists on the left and define values in the fields on the right Use the _ character to represent any single symbol and use the character to represent any series of symbols in the condition string Relation between these conditions is defined with And Or options 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 154 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual For more complex filtering use the Filter Builder In this dialog you can set as much conditions as you need To launch the builder use the Filter Editor item of the column header popup menu a gt Filter Bui
49. compression is disabled If a database mostly stores difficult to compress binary data such as raster images in JPEG the compression function cannot significantly reduce the backup file size gt Q Can I restore a backup file of EMS SQL Backup on SQL Server with no EMS SQL Backup components installed No you cannot However you can use the ConvertUtil exe command line utility which does not need to be installed and registered to convert backup files of EMS SQL Backup format to a standard SQL Server format After being converted backup can be restored using standard SQL Server tools gt Q What are the reasons for reduction of time required for backup and recovery A The compression level selection allows you to find a compromise between the backup speed and file size At the same time the backup time execution can be reduced up to 80 compared with a native tool due to a lower load on the disk subsystem Q Does EMS SQL Backup use undocumented features of SQL Server A EMS SQL Backup uses only documented features of SQL Server which guarantee its correct working on all available versions of SQL Server as well as on future version releases Q Can EMS SQL Backup perform a standard backup suitable for recovery on SQL Server without using EMS SQL Backup A Yes EMS SQL Backup can do it To do this you need to select SQL Server as a backup type in the Backup Wizard Q Does EMS SQL Backup support log shipping A EMS
50. corresponding button In the dialog appeared enter a Template name and define whether databases selected in the task should be saved in the template being created Eg Conversion to Template Eu Convert Task DB integrity check to Template Template name DB integrity check V Save database selection o j cae j Hep This template will be automatically added to the Task templates list 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 176 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 3 Step templates The Step Templates section allows you to manage Step Templates a E EMS SQL Backup Administration Console Col e km y Servers Policies Templates Activities Templates Step Templates ss Name Description View E H Preset templates Templates provided by EMS Policy Templates DB integrity check Checks the allocation structural and logical integrity of all the objects in the da Task Templates Reorganize DB indices Reorganizes one or more indices for a table in the databases Z Step Templates Shrink DB Shrinks the size of the data files in the databases Schedule Templates Z Update DB statistics Updates information about the distribution of key values in the database tables 2A Backup transaction log Backs up transaction log Edit Custom templates Create your own tempales or done and change preset samples LH Po seseeasessenenseneossney g Add
51. da rene een mayer nn er Ea eee License Manager entendre deyedens tee cue sade soc esveu she caceesaecucdddieubiseacccodeddevsudevusevedgeveesteckee Version history oiea aaee NEENA EA te ete dense etant tre eme ne ose AAA ERAAN 34 EMS SQL Backup FAQ 5 225 ed en nn ne ones nement net en nenuot en ed 37 Other EMS Products 2 cccc2cc0ececcadereccdecsedecccectececaazcccottazecceessetectas eieccac siaceconyssseccaysdedeccatastectes 42 Getting Started 50 EMS SQL Backup OVerview mms sennrrremennnnnnennnnneneennnennennnneneennnnennennnneneeennneneennnneneens 51 POLICY OVOIVICW RARE 52 Navigating seci EN ae et ne ne tt 53 Servers 56 Popop Menus aona ee er nee Groups popup Mende en nn tn ne en nt nn Group popup men SES a en A Pen Ro in gene Server popup menu Database popup menu Register Server Wizard Specifying connection parameters mmniiinanannnnnenenennnenernennesnesnesneeneeneeneeneeneanrennennnte 67 Defining additional options Performing Operation ni iniinnannnnnnnnrnnnnennennennenenenennnnneaneeneeneeneeneeneennenneaneannnese Install server side SQL Backup components ssnnnneenneennennns 71 Selecting installation type niinnnnnrnrnrenernneerersnennesnesnesneeneeneeneeneenranrarnnnee Specifying service account settings 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Performing Operation siniirnnnnnnnnenrnnnnennennenneneee
52. database development process design explore and maintain existing databases build compound SQL query statements manage database user rights and manipulate data in different ways 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 45 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual El Data Export for InterBase Firebird Export your data to any of 20 most popular data formats including MS Access MS Excel MS Word PDF HTML and more Data Import for InterBase Firebird Import your data from MS Access MS Excel and other popular formats to database tables via user friendly wizard interface Data Pump for InterBase Firebird Migrate from most popular databases MySQL SQL Server Oracle DB2 PostgreSQL etc to InterBase Firebird Data Generator for InterBase Firebird Generate test data for database testing purposes in a simple and direct way Wide range of data generation parameters DB Comparer for InterBase Firebird Compare and synchronize the structure of your databases Move changes on your development database to production with ease w A 4 di DB Extract for InterBase Firebird Create database backups in the form of SQL scripts save your database structure and table data as a whole or partially SQL Query for InterBase Firebird Analyze and retrieve your data build your queries visually work with query plans build charts based on retrieved data quickly and more Data Comparer for InterBase Firebird Comp
53. error You can check the access to the specified bucket by clicking the Test button You will be offered to select servers over which the connection should be checked If the specified container does not exist it will be created on performing test connection 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd ss EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 8 2 4 Proxy Use the Proxy tab to define connection settings These parameters will be used for to perform on line activation or deactivation of a license key ay Options Select a page _ Automatically detect proxy settings P Security E I have direct connection to the Internet Data refreshing 2 Cloud Connections Host proxy Port 8080 User name tester 1 User password Choose one of three options Automatically detect proxy settings I have direct connection to the Internet Manual proxy configuration Proxy Server If you have chosen to configure proxy manually then use this group of options to set the following proxy server parameters host port user name and user password if the Use authentication option is checked Click the Test connection button to check connection to the proxy server with the settings defined above 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd se EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 How to The succeeding p
54. from the list can be edited or x deleted lt lt Previous ste Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 260 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 8 3 Setting options At this step you can set shrinking options Ay Shrink Database wizard Shrink Database 1 x Set shrink database options Step 3 of 4 Shrink database when it exceeds 50 MB Freed space Amount of free space to remain after shrink 10 Retain freed space in database files Return freed space to operating system Suppress informational messages Shrink database when it exceeds Set database size limit Database will be shrunk when its size goes over this limit Freed space Amount of free space to remain after shrink Use this field to define percentage of free space that will be left in database file after it is shrunk You need to decide whether freed space should be retained in database files or returned to operating system Suppress informational messages Enable the option to disable informational messages lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 261 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 8 4 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start the operation Click Finish to create
55. full restoring You can add backup files manually from the local or network folder or cloud by choosing the Select files option Note If you have selected the backup that is not found on the local drive it will be searched in the cloud automatically on proceeding to the next step The search is performed in the clouds that were specified during the backup and in the similar cloud storages from the Cloud Connections list Press the Next button to proceed to the Specifying the elements of backup for History backup source or Defining the target database parameters for Files backup source Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 24 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 2 1 1 Selecting files manually Using the Select files option you can add manually add backup file stored on the local network drive or cloud Backup Provider EMS SQL Backup SQL Server Backup Source History Select files server Hois2014 7 i r Set password pa Date Database Type Encrypted Backup file First LSN l x v 25 05 2015 14 18 02 AdventureWorks Full False C Backups SQL2014 SQL20 4641000000024 E For every selected file displays additional information Date Database Type Encrypted First LSN Storage name Last LSN Check Point LSN Differential Base LSN Add Local File Add Network File Click this button to search for the backup files on the local server or network mac
56. idle Start once This option can be used when a single task performance should be scheduled Recurring from date Select this option if recurring task performance needed Frequency Restrict task execution start and finish date in Occurs Daily Weekly Monthly from date to date fields and set its interval of recurrence at Recurs every N days Daily frequency Set exact time at Occurs once or interval at Recurs every from to for the schedule NB When creating the policy you can specify whether local Console or server time will be used for execution 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 18 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 4 2 Creating schedule from template If you already have a configured schedule included in a policy you can create a template on its basis which can be later used for creating a new schedule All parameters that have been defined during the schedule creation will be saved in this template In order to create a template based on a schedule open the policy this schedule is included in and select the l Copy to Templates schedule context menu item or use the corresponding button In the dialog appeared enter a Template name for the template being created Eg Conversion to Template xa Convert Schedule Saturday night at 1 o clock to Template Template name Saturday night at 1 o dock This template will be automatically added to t
57. manually 1 Register in the Members Area at https secure sqlmanager net login 2 Open My Registered Products section 3 Expand key list for desired product 4 Choose Deactivate License action 5 Enter into a web form the deactivation code Copy OYvRANCyO0YvRANCyCkIDMzkzOTQOMDAWMDAWwMDAtMjg 1QWoLif7j7UGGLChqyVdXGKWpA0xBfg 6 Click Deactivate button on web form 7 Click Finish button to complete EMS SQL Backup license deactivation process Hep lt Back Next gt To perform license deactivation via web site follow these steps Register in the Members Area at https secure sqlmanager net login Open My Registered Products section Expand key list for desired product Choose Deactivate License action Enter into a web form the deactivation code from the box below To copy this code to Clipboard click the Copy button Click Deactivate button on web form Click Finish button on the final step of the Wizard to complete EMS SQL Backup license deactivation process 01 R U NH SN 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 5 2 3 Performing online deactivation This step appears only in case the Deactivate EMS SQL Backup License online option was selected on the first step ES License Deactivation Wizard tio sql2012 xen Product license deactivation process Step 2 of 3 Deactivating SQL Backup license
58. necessary files click the Next button to proceed to the Viewing summary information step lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd Next step gt gt 109 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 9 3 Viewing summary information This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start the operation Get Backup to Console Click Run to start the operation Verify the choices made in the wizard Step 3 of 3 Options Transfer file from server Destination folder Files for transfer tio sql2014 C Backups SQL2014_AdventureWorks_Full_2015 01 16_10 54 18 bkp QL2014_AdventureWorks_Differential_2015 01 20_14 29 53 bkp SQL2014_AdventureWorks_Transaction_log_2015 01 20_14 30 12 bkp After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Run button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd mo EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 10 Reports Using reports you can view and save information to any available format about task execution that is displayed in the grid of a Launches area To open a report on a policy task execution the Preview window use the Report button on the Launches area toolbar or select the El Show Report popup menu item There are three types of reports e Single server report
59. new Step Template for further use selecting Shrink Database step at the Templates tab Steps of the Shrink Database wizard Naming template Selecting database Setting options Performing operation See also Backup Database Restore Database Execute SOL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 257 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 8 1 Naming step You can name the step using the Name field The Description field can be used to define brief info for the created step IR Shrink Database wizard Shrink Database 1 Set step name and description Step 1 of 4 The Shrink Database step reduces the disk space used by the database and log files by removing empty data and log pages Name Shrink Database 1 Description This step does not appear for Quick Maintenance Actions Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 258 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 8 2 Selecting database Use this step of the wizard to select databases to shrink fp Shrink Database wizard Shrink Database 1 Define database selectio
60. object You can get information about policy result status and next launch time Double click the policy or task to execute it If the policy or task is erroneous double clicking will initiate Resolve the problem dialog The context menu of the selected policy allows you to _ resolve the problem for erroneous policy 8 execute a policy E pause policy execution 2 view policy history 4 edit policy in Policy editor Launches Each policy consists of a set of tasks This area displays information about task launches launch date and time task status and message You can review tasks execution and execute the task manually or ignore the problems using the popup window Set the limit of days for displaying in the dialog Environment Options at the Refresh options tab Launches Y Filter On Status td Finished Status Message Failed Warning Missed 120 13 14 27 45 27 05 2013 14 28 14 Succeed 7 Succeeded E Ignored T Waiting 12013 14 27 45 27 05 2013 14 28 14 Succeed Show details 2013 14 26 19 27 05 2013 14 26 49 Succeed Executing Aborted Start date From date 13 05 2013 To date 27 05 2013 Apply Fiter Discard Filter Cancel Launches can be filtered by status or execution date using the Filter button To apply or discard filter use corresponding buttons Use the Show details button in the Message column to view deta
61. or Ins key to define database table view name After you click the Enter button the database table view will be added to the list Any database table view from the list can be edited or x deleted lt lt Previous ste Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 266 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 9 3 Setting options Use this step to define basic update statistics options 24 Update Statistics step wizard Update Statistics step 1 Set task options Step 3 of 4 Update All existing statistics Column statistics only Index statistics only Options Full scan Sample 10 Percent x Resample No recompute Update All existing statistics Select this option if you need to update all statistics Column statistics only Use this option to update column statistics only Index statistics only This option indicates that only index statistics will be updated Options Full scan Specifies that all rows in table or view should be read to gather the statistics This option provides the same behavior as Sample 100 Percent 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 267 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Sample Specifies the percentage of the table or indexed view or the number of rows to sample when collecting statistics for larger tables or views Resample Option specifi
62. out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode Databases If EMS SQL Backup provider is used you can select multiple databases in case of SQL Server backup only one database can be specified All Use this option to select both system and user databases All system This option indicates that only system databases should be backed up All user Select this option to back up user databases only By mask This option allows defining database selection by mask Use for a set of any characters and for any single character in the database name By list This option allows you to select databases manually If you are creating a step in a policy template then you are able to enter databases manually 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 1 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Databases By List These databases F 9 TestDB 8 AdventureWorks AdventureWorks 1 Use the button or Ins key to define database name After you click the Enter button the database will be added to the list Any database from the list can be edited or x deleted 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 199 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 1 4 Defining SQL Backup settings Use this step of the wizard to define EMS SQL Backup backup settings This step is availa
63. remote computer You must have an account with SQL Server System Administrator Privileges such as Sa Q I failed to install server components remotely from EMS SQL Backup Console due to insufficient privileges or errors on installation Can I run the installation wizard on the server machine to install server components A Yes you can use the special mode for EMS SQL Backup installation program 1 Copy the installation package SQLBackupSetup 1 x x xxxx msi to the server machine 2 Run the following command as Administrator SQLBackupSetup exe var Serverlnstall 1 3 Follow the steps of the installation wizard It will automatically find all local server instances for installing server components Q What kind of account should be used for running EMS SQL Backup service A To run EMS SQL Backup you can use any account with the following privileges Access to SQL Server with Server Administrator Privileges Write access to a directory which is used for creating backups v Ability of authorization on another computer on a network for read record access to a general directory while log shipping process For example a system domain user with all the mentioned above privileges can be used If log shipping process is not planned Local System embedded account can be used as a system user account Q Policy execution failed with the error The task cannot be completed The owner NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM of SqlBackup_XXXXXXXX_Task do
64. several tasks steps then it is recommended to open every step editor and check needed databases servers on a Selection tab A policy was created on separate databases servers 1 If a policy includes a big number of tasks steps then it is recommended to do the following e unite databases servers from this policy into a solution and then add needed databases servers to it e create a template based on this policy without saving selected databases by choosing the Create Template from Policy its context menu item e create a policy based on this template on the created solution by using the J Maintenance Policies Create from Templates solution context menu item 2 If a policy includes several tasks steps then it is recommended to open every step editor and check needed databases servers on a Selection tab 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 408 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 10 Create a policy rapidly on several servers databases The most efficient way to create a policy rapidly on several servers databases is to create it on a solution that unites these servers databases In order to create a policy rapidly on several servers or databases perform the following operations 1 create a solution by selecting L Create Solution context menu item of Solutions section 2 move needed databases servers to this solution Note One solution cannot include both databases and servers 3 Se
65. side components Stand alone local server side components installer Server side components properties Server properties 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 4 1 Selecting updating removing type Select EMS SQL Backup server side components updating removing type ES Installation wizard Update server side components on tio sql2014 i Welcome to the Installation wizard Step 1 of 4 Welcome to the Installation wizard This wizard allows you to install modify or delete EMS SQL Backup server side components Both local and remote operations with the server side components are possible Current version 1 5 0 8352 Target version 1 5 0 8355 Remote installation via 5 SQL Server tio sql2014 Network Folder settings Remote resource ADMINS Custom Share path ADMINS Share local path SYSTEMROOT Windows authentication This account If you are updating uninstalling server side components on the local server then on the first step the server name is displayed For a remote server choose the way the service will be updated uninstalled SQL Server Update uninstall server side components via SQL Server connection It is recommended to use the SQL Server option if the SQL Server service is running under the account with Administrator privileges or LocalSystem account Network Folder Update uninstall s
66. sql2008 E These databases EN e FG master a ka salexpress E model EE dean_winxp sql2008r2 msdb EE 192 168 66 53 AE EE deimos sqi2012 Vi Demods olivia 8 hr aschel sql2014 VG LargeDs B orphaned B TEST B ves ME xtraLargeDB ox _concel_J __ Hee Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode It is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy Databases and objects All Use this option to select both system and user objects All system This option indicates that only system objects should be selected All user Select this option to select user objects only By mask This option allows defining objects selection by mask Use for a set of any characters 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s56 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual and for any single character in the object name By list This option allows you to select objects manually If you are creating a step template then you can add a database to the list by using the button or Ins key Note The server is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy When you are editing a step on creating a policy from template then if the database s defined on the Selecting database step are missed on the selected serve
67. start working with policy you need to create it at first Policies page provides all necessary tools to manage policies Move to the page and use the a Create New Policy or Create Policy from Template popup menu item You can easily create a template from the existing policy using i Create Template from Policy menu item The template based on the selected policy will be automatically added to the Policy Templates list Note The databases selected in the policy can be saved in template as well Policies at this tab can be viewed in two modes Policy Tasks and Policy Servers Select the Policy on the left and switch between two corresponding modes to see policy s tasks or servers on the top level For each object of the tree you can see more Detailed info at the bottom panel See also Getting Started Servers Templates Activities Maintenance Actions Options 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd ne EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 1 Popup menus Popup menu of the object contains the list of actions that can be applied to the object The following popup menu is available in the policy list at the Policies tab Policy popup menu Task popup menu Schedule context menu Server context menu 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 117 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 1 1 Policy popup menu The following actions can be applied to the policy ja Cr
68. step item Step 4 of 4 Verify the choices made in the wizard Step Name Shrink Database 1 Kind Shrink Database Database selection ka Select Databases AdventureWorks doom_server tserv2005 Select Databases AdventureWorks DemoDB LargeDB Shrinking options Shrink database when it exceeds 50 Mb Freed space Return freed space to operating system Amount of free space to remain after shrink 10 Suppress info messages Yes After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Finish button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 9 Update Statistics Update Statistics step allows you to perform the update statistics operation in your database the UPDATE STATISTICS statement is issued This operation is used to updates the statistics for the specified tables and views To launch the updating operation immediately select Quick Maintenance Action a Update Statistics step popup menu item in the Servers tab To perform scheduled update of statistics on regular basis you need to include this task into Policy 1 At Step 2 of the Create Policy wizard click Create new step button and select Update Statistics step type 2 Also you can create a new Step Template for further use selecting Update Statistics step at the Templates tab Steps of the Update Statistics wizard Nam
69. step wizard Update Statistics step 1 Define database selection for servers Step 2 of 4 Servers Databases By List X ME k EE aschel sal2008 ME ka sqlexpress Objects All 5 le dean_winxp sql2008r2 ME 192 168 66 53 vie E These databases IG deimos s9 2012 E master NE oivia model E aschel sql2014 msdb J AdventureWorks VE DemoDB HE hr T FA orphaned TEST 8 ves G xtralargeDB lt Back Next gt Finish Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode Databases and objects All Use this option to select both system and user objects All system This option indicates that only system objects should be selected All user Select this option to select user objects only By mask 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 265 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual This option allows defining objects selection by mask Use for a set of any characters and for any single character in the object name By list This option allows you to select objects manually If you are creating a step in a policy template then you are able to enter databases tables and views manually These databases 8 AdventureWorks 9 TestDB These views de Bemp ven Use the button
70. step wizard Log Shipping step 1 Specify backup options Step 3 of 5 Backup folder _ backup_root_folder server check Available tags backup root folder server Max Thread Count RE V Compression Compression Level 2 ly V Encryption Encryption Password exe Confirm Password ss Encryption Type rijndael Note backup_root_folder can be configured in the Server side Components Properties dialog Hep lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Backup folder Specify the directory for backup It is set relatively the source server You can check availability of this folder by clicking the corresponding button Max Thread Count Indicates the number of threads to be used for backup operation Increase the number of threads for faster speed If you are using a multi processor system increasing this value can fasten backup speed You are recommended to set one thread fewer than the number of processors Compression Enable the option to compress backup Compression Level Defines backup file compression level Use 1 for the best speed and 4 for the best compression W Encryption 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 288 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Enable the option to encrypt backup Encryption Password Set password that is used for backup encryption Confirm password Confirm the password specified as an encryption password above
71. this item to create a folder for backups on FTP server FTP with SSL Implicit and Explicit is available e Amazon S3 Cloud Connection This connection is used for storing backups in Amazon S3 bucket e Secure FTP Connection Choose this connection if you want to store backups on SFTP server Connection is established over SSH channel e Microsoft Azure Cloud This connection is used for uploading backups to Microsoft Azure container of BLOB objects 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 387 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 8 2 3 1 SMB CIFS Connection The SMB CIFS Connection Settings dialog is provided for configuring local or remote network folders ES SMB CIFS Connection Settings x Name C backup_copies Folder C backup_copies ee gt V Windows Authentication Tet x cae tp Name Specify the name for the connection The connection name must be unique among all that were already created Folder Specify the local or network folder for storing backup copies Use the ellipsis Les button to browse for directory By clicking the e button you can open the specified directory Note that a path to a network folder must be specified in the UNC format V Overwrite existing file If this option is checked than the backup file with the same filename will be overwritten in the specified location Otherwise in this case the uploading
72. transaction log Eee Select a page z Schedules to be used Name amp description a Steve j Name a A D E Create New Schedule LA Qa Create Schedule from Template C3 Edit Schedule Ga 9 Remove Schedule pese Copy Schedule to Templates EJ amp Create new schedule This button opens the Schedule Editor allowing you to create a schedule a Create New Schedule from Template Use this button to create schedule from template On pressing this button the Item selection dialog is opened allowing you to select any of the available templates or create a new one Edit Schedule This button opens selected schedule for editing Delete Schedule Click this button to remove selected schedule from the list Copy step to templates Use this button to create a template based on the selected schedule You can view each step Description if any in the corresponding field 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 175 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 2 3 Creating template from task If you already have a service task with defined configuration you can create a template on its basis which can be later used for creating a new service task It will contain all steps and schedules of this task with their defined parameters In order to create a template based on a service task open the policy it is included in and select the amp Copy to Templates task context menu item or use the
73. tserv2005 x olivia Z Ei General Ig Selection Source DB Destination DB Overwrite New database AdventureWorks lt None gt W DemoDB DemoDB EJ hr lt None gt v LargeDB lt None gt W orphaned lt None gt v TEST lt None gt v C lt gt o e CUS ves z xtraLargeDB lt Create new gt 7 AdventureWorks new_db Data folder C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 11 MSSQLSERVER MSSQL ID Log folder C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 11 MSSQLSERVER MSSQL D Source server Select the server where the database that you want to back up to another server is located Destination server Select the server where transaction logs are shipped to from the Destination server list Set the database pairs in the grid The backups of transaction logs are performed on the source server and restored on the destination server If the destination database does not exist you can select New database item in the Destination DB column and specify its name in the New database column If the destination database needs rewriting set the corresponding flag in the Overwrite column Creating and overwriting of the databases is performed by creating a full backup of the source database and its further restoring Even in case of scheduled execution creating of a database is executed immediately on wizard finish Data folder Specify the path for data MDF files for the newly created database 1999 2015 EMS Data
74. 01 R U NH NO Next step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 24 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 5 1 4 Entering license activation code Here you are to enter the license activation code that you have or that you have copied from the website Enter the license activation code Step 3 of 4 SQL Server instance ID 880 1 36400000000 1638 License Activation Code OVpJIR ictQlpONVotUEQxU 1QtMjBHRFY tN 1BKSTKtTENEMOOtMFhGM 1ItMzJUSDUtWE42NEsKQTUyRSO3QUIFNyOINDEyNUJDMzAwMD AwMDAwLT JDNDYtMDAwMDE3LU 1BVFIZNy 1GQIRISZEtRjZNNUNGLT dFSFgxUC IKTKFEQKMtSkdXRTdGLTVUNE 5FQi1ZWFQyMOEtUDRD UTNVCIZhc2IhIFB 1cGtpbiBDb21wYW55 Press the Next button to activate EMS SQL Backup license Ce Gre Foe Next step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 25 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 5 1 5 Performing online activation This step appears only in case the Activate EMS SQL Backup License online option was selected on the first step ES License Activation wizard tio sql2012 Product license activation process Step 3 of 4 Activating SQL Backup license This may take a few minutes please wait On this step the deactivation of the previous license and the activation of the new license is performed To configure connection parameters for performing activation see the Proxy tab of the Options dialog After the op
75. 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd ss EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 8 2 3 Cloud Connections Cloud Connections tab allows you to set connections parameters to external storages for your backups When configuring backup operation you will be offered to select storage for backup files copies among those which are defined here The selection is performed on the Specifying cloud connections step of the Backup wizard E Options mtm Select a page EENE Security Data refreshing Co aschel Delete ftp ester aschel 29 backups SEE Prox s3testingpurpose LA y Delete s3 stestingpupose backups Standard 192 168 66 48 a ng PE Delete sftp Aester 192 168 66 48 22 backups C backup copies r Delete C backup_copies with WinAuth To add a storage to the list click the Create new connection button In the opened window select the needed connection type 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 6 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual ES Choose connection type x SMB CIFS Connection Local or Network folder FTP Connection FTP with SSL support Amazon S3 Cloud Connection Standard or Reduced Redundancy storage Secure FTP Connection Connection over SSH Microsoft Azure Cloud Blob storage Dp BBE e SMB CIFS Connection Select this item to create a folder for backups on a local or network storage e FTP Connection Select
76. 20 Update EMS SQL Backup EMS SQL Backup update process consists of EMS SQL Backup Administration Console and Server side components update In order to update EMS SQL Backup Administration Console please do the following e download the full installation package of EMS SQL Backup from the download page available at our site e close EMS SQL Backup application if it is running e repeat the steps you have made for the first time installation e run EMS SQL Backup using its shortcut in the corresponding group of Windows Start menu After EMS SQL Backup Administration Console is launched you will be warned that server side components version is out of date You will be offered to update server side components This is done by means of Update Remove server side EMS SQL Backup components If you do not have permissions for remote update of server side components via EMS SQL Backup Administration Console you can copy EMS SQL Backup setup file to the server machine and run installation there Server side components update process locally on a server is similar to their installation process and is performed by means of Stand alone remote components Installer To update server components you need to select the W Update option and then select instances on which you want to update components 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd se EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 21 Remove EMS SQL Backup In order to
77. 33 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual this option to synchronize the operations for the Transaction Log Shipping task The bottom panel shows errors and warnings for all sections of the policy if any 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 134 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 3 2 General The General section allows you to view and edit the set of tasks and schedules Policy is a set of schedule s and tasks each containing at least one step 32 Policy editor Policy 2 Select a page F Name amp description Li gt Tasks GE Sunday DB backup a Steps Z Shrink DB amp Schedules H Sunday night at 4 o clock a Weekdays differential DB backup Steps Differential backup DB ES Schedules Qa 6 days of week He g Notifications a o E w a gt You can edit objects using the buttons in the header Edit task Delete task or Delete key Add task or Ins key Also you can manage the objects Steps Tasks and Schedules using the buttons on the right or from the popup menu E Create new Select the required object in the list and click this button to create a new object a Creating new from template Click this button to see the list of templates for this object and create a new one based on the template 2 Edit Click this button to change object settings
78. 99 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 3 3 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start the installation process Ee Installation wizard Install server side components on tio sql2008 my Summary Step 3 of 3 Verify the choices made in the wizard Options SQL Server name tio sql2008 Host name tio Resource name Shared Action type Install User sa Password Seeeeeeeeeeeee Service account LocalSystem You can Verify the choices made in wizard in the corresponding area and click the Install button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 4 Update Remove server side SQL Backup components Use this wizard to delete or update EMS SQL Backup server side components at the server After uninstalling all jobs linked with policies will be deleted Note In Update mode all instances of the selected server are updated Select Update Remove server side EMS SQL Backup components item from the server s popup menu at the Servers tab Steps Selecting updating removing type Selecting operation type Specifying service account settings Performing operation See also Register Server Wizard Install server side EMS SQL Backup Components Update server
79. AdministratorRepos fy AW_Maintenance Subplan_1 fh AW Maintenance Subnlan ox cancel Hp Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode It is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy SQL Server Agent s job This field indicates which SQL Server Agent job should be executed You can re arrange jobs order for execution using arrow buttons on the right Use x button or Delete key to remove job from the list Note The server is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd se EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 3 Execute T SQL statement Execute T SQL Statement step editor provides the same set of options as Execute T SQL Statement wizard The following pages are available in this dialog Name_and description General Selection See also Backup database Execute SOL Server Agent job History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Shrink Database Reorganize Indices Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd se EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 3 1 Name and description This page a
80. DemoDB DB integrity check ka 11 02 2014 16 00 00 Success Shrink DB ka 11 02 2014 16 30 00 Success Backup DB ka 11 02 2014 16 10 00 Success E Sd Typical data warehouse maintenance Waiting Launches Filter Off Name Planned Start Started Finished Status Message gt Shortcuts a Shrink DB 11 02 2014 15 30 00 11 02 2014 15 30 00 11 02 2014 15 30 01 Success om Troubled servers 4 Backup DB 11 02 2014 15 10 00 11 02 2014 15 10 00 11 02 2014 15 10 06 Success g ka salexpress 4 DB integrity check 11 02 2014 15 00 00 11 02 2014 15 00 00 11 02 2014 15 00 13 Success g doom_server tserv2005 Shrink DB 11 02 2014 14 30 00 11 02 2014 14 30 00 11 02 2014 14 30 01 Success 4 Backup DB 11 02 2014 14 10 00 11 02 2014 14 10 00 11 02 2014 14 10 02 Success 4 DB integrity check 11 02 2014 14 00 00 11 02 2014 14 00 00 11 02 2014 14 00 05 Success L Shrink DB 11 02 2014 13 30 00 11 02 2014 13 30 00 11 02 2014 13 30 01 Success Backup DB 11 02 2014 13 10 00 11 02 2014 13 10 00 11 02 2014 13 10 04 Success 4 DB integrity check 11 02 2014 13 00 00 11 02 2014 13 00 00 11 02 2014 13 00 15 Success ai Shrink DR 1109 9014 19 20 00 11 079 9014 19 20 00 11 02 9014 19 20 00 Sucrace as F Processes 0 Servers The Explorer area allows you to access servers and databases Servers and databases can be included in Groups and Solutions Groups are used to organize servers by some specific criteria for example location Solutions unite servers to be inclu
81. EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 1 2 Selecting database provider Select the backup provider at this step W Backup Database step wizard Backup Database step 1 Select backup provider Step 2 of 8 Backup Provider EMS SQL Backup j Easy to use adjustable with enhanced options Allows multiple databases backup compression and encryption of backup files SQL Server Backup is provided by native SQL Server means Only single database can be backed up Finish Cancel Use EMS SQL Backup provider if you need to backup multiple databases with advanced options This kind of backup is quicker and creates compressed backup files The files created with EMS SQL Backup provider cannot be restored using standard server tools you need either use EMS SQL Backup restore or convert the backup file to SQL Server type Use SQL Server provider to perform backup of a single database using native SQL Server tools lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 196 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 1 3 Selecting database Use this step of the wizard to select database s for backup operation Q Backup Database step wizard Backup Database step 1 Define database selection for servers Step 3 of 8 Backup Type See Databases By List X T Database differential E aschel sgl2008 ss T
82. EMS SQL Backup Distrib Service on the machine where EMS SQL Backup Console is installed on the server C Program Files EMS SQL Backup Service Where I nputFile stands for the EMS SQL Backup file to be converted O utputFile sets the result name of SQL Server backup file D atabases sets database name s which data should be extracted Optional parameters H elp Help outputs reference information P assword sets the password to convert encrypted backups Example C Program Files EMS SQL Backup Service ConvertUtil exe I C Data TEST bkp O TESTms bak D Employee Departments P 8p5Zh79 Note If EMS SQL Backup backup is split into several files you only need to specify the first file from the chain all subsequent files are processed automatically Note If on backup you specified more than one threads at Defining EMS SQL Backup settings you will get n MS SQL Server files as a result of conversion You will need to select all of those n files on restore by MS SQL Server means 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 44 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 10 3 Server folder dialog SQL Server Folders dialog allows you to browse directories on the server 5 Server Folder Dialog x E C a CA SRecycle Bin m Bo anaes SLI BER RRS pres anna ane een ni ne ASIA en SRA AEROS AE ARR ARE SADE AA DR A AE PEL EEDEN EAEAN A MSSQLSERVER SQLEXPRESS bkp storage Boot
83. EMS SQL Backup server side components via NetBIOS How can I fix the problem Question answer list Q What versions of SQL Server does EMS SQL Backup support A EMS SQL Backup works with all SQL Server versions except Compact Edition from SQL 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Server 2000 up to SQL Server 2014 Must EMS SQL Backup be installed on each server which I want to work with Yes EMS SQL Backup server components must be installed on each instance of SQL Server gt I have 5 SQL Servers 2 of which have two SQL Server instances running how many licenses for EMS SQL Backup do I need to purchase Totally you have 7 instances of SQL Server it means that you need to purchase 7 licenses for EMS SQL Backup gt O How does EMS SQL Backup reduce backup size This is achieved by compressing data received from the server during the backup process gt Does the backup compression depend on SQL Server version or edition EMS SQL Backup uses its own data compression function which does not depend on a version and edition of SQL Server gt How much is a backup file size reduced and what does it depend on It depends on data stored in the database and on a selected in EMS SQL Backup compression level In case of text numeric data when using compression a backup file size can be up to 80 less in comparison when
84. Errors for Selected Launches its status or statuses of all erroneous tasks Ignore Errors for All Problem Launches 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd n EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 14 Convert SQL Server maintenance plan to SQL Backup policy Configured SQL Server maintenance plans can be used in EMS SQL Backup after their conversion to EMS SQL Backup policies To convert SQL Server maintenance plan to EMS SQL Backup policy perform the following operations 1 Select the 2 Maintenance Policies Convert from Maintenance Plan server context menu item to launch Maintenance plan conversion wizard 2 On the second step of the wizard select the maintenance plan for conversion 3 On the third step of the wizard you can view conversion results Maintenance plan subplans are converted to policy service tasks In case some mistakes occurred on maintenance plan conversion you can correct them in the policy editor that is launched by clicking the Edit Policy button 4 It is recommended to check the Disable Maintenance plan option to disable tasks execution in maintenance plan being converted 5 On the last step view conversion settings and click the Finish button Created policy appears in the list on the Policies tab 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd as EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 15 Manage templates effectively Using the template
85. L Backup Administration console User manual Show all tasks Show only active tasks Toggles between displaying all tasks performed within 24 hours and tasks that are being executed at the moment See also Getting Started Servers Policies Templates Maintenance Actions Options 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 190 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 Maintenance Actions Step in EMS SQL Backup is a basic component of server maintenance It sets the maintenance action to be performed over the database s and is used in Tasks and Policies Steps can be run separately for a single database server for performing immediate maintenance operation Steps can be included into Polices for scheduled performing Creating Steps Editing Existing Steps Note To run the immediate maintenance action use the A Quick Maintenance Action item from the database server popup menu Backup Database Restore Database Execute SQL Server Agent job Executing T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Shrink Database Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping See also Getting Started Servers Policies Templates Activities Options 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd in EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 Creating Steps Step in EMS SQL Backup is a basic compo
86. Logging conditions Last full backup older than 7 day s 00 00 00 La HH mm ss The options below allow you to define conditions which EMS SQL Backup should perform logging by W No backup Enable this option to log the list of databases with no backup Last full backup The option should be used to log the list of databases with old full backups Last full backup older than Defines the time point relatively to current date The list of databases with full backup made before this point will be logged Wl Last log backup Use this option to log the list of databases with old log backups Last log backup older than Define the time point relatively to current date The list of databases with log backup made before this point will be logged W Index fragmentation Enable this option to log the list of databases with high fragmentation 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd su EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Index fragmentation more than Define the level of index fragmentation Databases list with index fragmentation level above specified will be added to log Only check indices with more than This option indicates that only indices with page amount above specified will be checked WlIntegrity check SQL Server 2005 or higher Enable this option to log the list of databases with out of date integrity check Last integrity check older than Define the time point rel
87. MS Database Management Solutions Ltd o EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 7 Server properties Server properties window displays settings that have been defined on server registration To open it use 1 Server properties context menu item in Server Explorer Use this dialog to view and edit the registration properties of the server Server connection info Server options See also Register Server Wizard Install server side EMS SQL Backup Components Update Remove server side EMS SQL Backup components Server side components properties 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 95 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 7 1 Server connection info This dialog allows you to view and edit connection properties in the corresponding boxes 1 Server properties aschel sql2008 EE Select a page Server Name aschel sql2008 Alias aschel sa 2008 Authentication Windows Authentication SQL Server Authentication User Name tester Password XXXXXXX Timeout 30 Test Connection Server Name Displays SQL Server instance name Alias Stores the server alias which is displayed in the DB Explorer tree and program tools It is set on server registration in the program Authentication Specify the type of authentication to be used for the connection Windows authentication or SQL Server authentication SQL Server auth
88. Management Solutions Ltd 22 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 11 4 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can perform maintenance cleanup Click Finish to create step item Step 4 of 4 Verify the choices made in the wizard Step Name Maintenance Cleanup step 1 Kind Maintenance Cleanup step File selection local sql20 14cs Backup files in C Backups files with extension bkp Report files in C Backups files with extension txt Backup files in s3 backupsstest test Standard files by mask bkp Cleanup criteria Remove SQL Backup and Cloud files older than 7 Day s Remove SQL Server files older than 1 Month s After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Finish button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 23 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 12 Transaction Log Shipping Transaction Log Shipping step allows you to create transaction log backups ship them to the destination server via a shared folder and restore on the destination server To perform log shipping step you must have at least two SQL Server instances version of destination server cannot be earlier than the source server version the source database must use the full or bulk logged recovery m
89. Parameters Logger Database Parameters Logger step allows you to check database parameters such as information about backups index fragmentation transaction logs data files integrity check operations and more and log warnings if parameters do not satisfy given conditions for efficient database maintenance To launch the database parameters logger operation immediately select A Quick Maintenance Actions Database Parameters Logger popup menu item in the Servers tab To perform scheduled database parameters logging on regular basis you need to include this task into Policy 1 At Step 2 of the Create Policy wizard click Create new step button and select Database Parameters Logger step type 2 Also you can create a new Step Template for further use selecting Database Parameters Logger step at the Templates tab Steps of the Database Parameters Logger wizard Naming template Selecting database Setting conditions Performing operation See also Backup Database Restore Database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Shrink Database Update Statistics Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 270 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 10 1 Naming step You can name the step using the Name field The Description field can be used to define brief
90. Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 26 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 3 1 Naming step You can name the step using the Name field The Description field can be used to define brief info for the created step mg Execute SQL Server Agent job step wizard Execute SQL Server Agent job step 1 Gal Set step name and description Step 1 of 3 The Execute SQL Server Agent Job step allows you to run selected SQL Server Agent jobs as a part of the policy Name Execute SQL Server Agent job step 1 Description This step does not appear for Quick Maintenance Actions Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 227 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 3 2 Selecting job Use this step to set the correspondence between instances and jobs to be executed igi Execute SQL Server Agent job step wizard Execute SQL Server Agent job step 1 Ea Select the job to execute Step 2 of 3 E Servers Selected DE Server Agent jobs in execution order TL TT VG EESTI h eo Acventrewors EE aschel sql2008 i DemoDB_shrink e ka sqlexpress Le MG dean_winxp sql2008r2 192 168 66 53 EE deimos sql2012 MO olivia Available SQL Server Agent jobs fad AdventureWorks_check ip ayz_ft faa avg_stats_SQLAdministratorRep
91. SQL Server authentication SQL Server authentication requires authorization information User name and 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd e EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Password Timeout Use this option to restrict time for EMS SQL Backup to connect to server Test connection You can test specified connection settings by pressing this button Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd e EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 2 2 Defining additional options At this step you can define the options for the registered servers and finish registering the server oh SQL Server Registration wizard aschel sql2008 lab Se Set additional options for the server Step 2 of 3 Description Opitonal server description here V Connect automatically on Console startup J Cor V Install Update server side SQL Backup components on this SQL Server Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel W Connect automatically on Console startup This option defines whether connection to the registered server should be performed on startup WI Connect to SQL Server after registration Enable the option to connect to the server right after it has been registered WI Install Update server side EMS SQL Backup components on this SQL Server If this option is checked then the Install Server side Components or the Updat
92. SQL Server authentication EMS SQL Backup identifies user by his server login and password Login and password management is accomplished by Login Manager If Server authentication is selected as the authentication type you should provide authorization settings User and Password Analyzing them a system determines information and therefore object access permissions Note The specified login must be a member of the system administrator role SQL Server port Identify the TCP IP port used by the SQL Server Instance After connection settings are specified click the Check connection button to check is the specified login is valid for running the Installer i e the specified login exists the password is correct and the login is a member of the sysadmin role 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd ss EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 6 2 Performing operation On this step of the wizard you can view the operation log i r side Components ion v1 5 Please wait until the process is finished Step 2 of 2 Operations log Installer is running under EMSDOMAIN tio install ocal SQL2014 OK Installer is running under EMSDOMAIN tio OS Service configured Service configs are saved Register MSSQLSERVER xp_emssqlangel After the operation is completed you can Copy the operation log using the context menu lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 E
93. Server Registration wizard aschel sql2008 a Specify the connection parameters Step 1 of 3 Welcome to the SQL Server Registration wizard This wizard allows you to set the connection parameters for the selected SQL Servers only once giving you the possibility to connect them quickly afterwards This wizard will guide you through the process of setting the connection parameters and customizing specific server options Server Name aschel sql2008 v Note Use host_name instance_name form for named instances of the SQL Server Alias aschel sal2008 Authentication Windows Authentication SQL Server Authentication User Name tester Password XXXXXXX Timeout 30 Server Name Use this field to select server to register You can select host from the drop down list or type in a host name manually Please note that if Microsoft SQL Server is installed as a named instance you should enter the name of your machine and the instance name in the Server name field in the following format computer_name sqlserver_instance_name e g MYCOMPUTER SQLEXPRESS Alias Define the server alias which is displayed in the DB Explorer tree and program tools By default a server alias generated by the application has the following format lt server_name gt Authentication Specify the type of Microsoft SQL Server authentication to be used for the connection Windows authentication or
94. Server instance is launched locally or remotely Server side components include the service installed on the server machine and extended stored procedures created in master database for each SQL Server instance EMS SQL Backup Administration Console is the basic tool for administration of SQL Server instances and maintenance polices maintaining status of instances and logs reviewing Task and policy execution process is initiated by the service running on SQL Server Interaction between EMS SQL Backup Administration Console and service on the server is implemented with extended stored procedures that manages policy execution without extra connections to the server and opening of additional ports Policy which is the main element of EMS SQL Backup is implemented as jobs in SQL Server and therefore its execution requires consistent work of SQL Agent See also Policy overview Navigating 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 52 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 2 2 Policy overview Policy in EMS SQL Backup is a set of scheduled tasks to be performed on the server s or database s each containing a number of steps Each Policy execution generates the result status that informs you about successful or failed policy executions After reviewing the errors you can ignore them or re execute the task For quicker creating of typical maintenance policies you can use Templates Policy is implemented as
95. Solutions Ltd 297 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Enable the option to encrypt backup Encryption Password Set password that is used for backup encryption Confirm password Confirm the password specified as an encryption password above Encryption Type Select the encryption algorithm lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 28 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 13 4 Specifying folders and recovery options At this step you need to set shared and destination folder and recovery options for the database restore i Database Shipping step wizard Database Shipping step 1 Specify shared and destination folder recovery options Step 4 of 5 Network shared folder kalshared Check Destination folder C Backups tJ check Recovery options No recovery leaves database in the restoring state Standby leaves database in read only and standby mode Undo file name Recovery Kill connections to destination database Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Network shared folder Specify the backup shared folder for copying full database backups of the source database Both source and destination servers should have access to this folder otherwise database shipping cannot be performed Click the Check button to make sure that the folder is accessible by both servers Destination
96. Step Templates Large data warehouse maintenance For large databases with low data change rate 1 Schedule Templates a Typical small sized database maintenance For small databases with common data change rate Typical middle sized database maintenance For medium sized databases with common data change rate Edit Typical large sized database maintenance For large sized databases with common data change rate E Add Small or middle sized OLTP databases maintenance For small or medium sized databases with high data change rate L Edit Large sized OLTP databases maintenance For large sized databases with high data change rate Delete Archive databases maintenance For databases that are periodically updated with a certain amount Cleaning logs and deleting obsolete backup files For removing old maintenance logs and unnecessary backup files Order B A Custom templates Create your own tempales or done and change preset samples Move Down gt For the system databases master model and msdb gt User databases maintenance n Ctr b All databases b r Transfer ia Edit Template LP Export Lg Delete Template Ctrl Delete Import ch Move Up LH Clone w Move Down g Export Template cf Import Template Clone Template fz Processes 0 You can manage policy templates using the buttons on the Toolbars or popup menu Add New Template Ctri Insert launches the wizard for creating a new policy template Lid Edit Template
97. XP Microsoft Windows 2003 Server Microsoft Windows 2008 Server Microsoft Windows Vista Microsoft Windows 7 Microsoft Windows 8 Net Framework 3 5 512 MB RAM or more 120MB of available HD space for program installation Super VGA 800x600 or higher resolution video adapter and monitor Super VGA 1024x768 or higher resolution video adapter and monitor recommended e Microsoft Mouse or compatible pointing device 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 15 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 3 Installation If you are installing EMS SQL Backup for the first time on your PC e download the EMS SQL Backup installation package from the download page available at our site e unzip the downloaded file to any local directory e g C unzipped e run SQLBackupSetup 1 x x xxxx msi from the local directory and follow the instructions of the installation wizard There are two modes of the EMS SQL Backup Console installation Typicaln Custom If you choose the Custom mode then you will be able to define the destination program folder and specify if the help file should be copied there or not After the installation process is completed find the EMS SQL Backup shortcut in the corresponding group of Windows Start menu If you want to upgrade an installed copy of EMS SQL Backup to the latest version e download the full installation package of EMS SQL Backup from the download page available at our site
98. a set of jobs in SQL Server and therefore its execution requires consistent work of SQL Agent See also EMS SQL Backup overview Navigating 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 53 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 2 3 Navigating Explorer is the basic navigation window for managing servers and databases It has a tree like structure and it allows you to perform operations with any object in the Explorer window Explorer is only available at the Servers tab of EMS SQL Backup Also from this tab you can get all information about policy status Servers al ts a SEC 4 F local gt Bra b ka salexpress 4 gt remote 4 doom_server tserv2005 G master B model B msdb Y AdventureWorks DemoDB LargeDB Test 3 xtraLargeDB b aschel sql2008 4 Solutions amp Solution 1 4 gt Databases B ka AdventureWorks 3 doom_server tserv2005 DemoDB Shortcuts master on doom_server tserv2005 aschel sql2008 Troubled servers nd ka sglexpress The following tabs are available on the top of the EMS SQL Backup window Gr Servers Policies Templates Activities Gears menu for configuring EMS SQL Backup Console settings 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Servers for managing servers databases and policies execution Policies for managing policies Templates for managing templates f
99. abase Management Solutions Ltd e EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 5 Update server side components The Update server side components tool allows you to update server side components on multiple instances at once To launch this tool select the Update Server side Components item of the Gears menu The list contains all currently connected servers with server side components version lower than EMS SQL Backup Console version Ee Update server side components Select servers to update server side components on v tio 1500 Change settings Current version 1 4 0 7746 Target version 1 5 0 8366 7 aschel sql2014 Change settings Current version Unknown Target version 1 5 0 8366 Access method SQL Se m er with password ster with password V tio sql2014 Change settings Current version 1 4 0 7746 Target version 1 5 0 8366 v tio sql2008 Change settings Current version 1 4 0 7746 Target version 1 5 0 8366 Access method SQL Server og on al System rver login sa with password Check the servers in the list which server side components should be updated Check the WI All checkbox to select all servers in the list Under the server name you can see parameters that will be used for updating Access method Service Windows log on Service SQL Server login and Network Folder authentication After selecting necessary instances and specifying all parameters cli
100. abase selected 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 123 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Proceed to the starting step of Policy wizard Steps Setting policy name and description Defining set of tasks Defining notification options Creating policy See also Policy editor Maintenance plan conversion Execute Policy Resolve problem Viewing Policy History 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 14 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 2 1 Setting policy name and description Use the first step of the wizard to set policy name description and time preference 8 Policy wizard Policy 2 es Welcome to the EMS SQL Backup Policy Creation wizard Step 1 of 4 This wizard will quide you through the step by step process of creating a new SQL Backup policy The policy is a logical set of maintenance tasks that need to be performed on databases or SQL server instances at the corresponding time schedules Each of the tasks in turn consists of one or more discrete maintenance steps such as Database Backup step or Database Integrity Check step The policy has an overall status that indicates the global result of executing all the policy tasks SQL Backup allows you to constantly monitor policy applying status in real time and has various notification and report options Created policy can be edited later in SQL Backup Administration Console you can add n
101. ack any uncommitted transactions After the recovery process the database is ready for use Undo file name Specify the undo file name so that the recovery effects can be undone The same undo file can be used for consecutive restores of the same database NB If free disk space is exhausted on the drive containing the specified undo file name the restore operation stops Set I Kill connections to destination database option ON for forced disconnection of all processes the database lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd so EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 13 5 Viewing summary information This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can perform database shipping Click Finish to create step item Step 5 of 5 Verify the choices made in the wizard Options Source server doom_server tserv2005 Destination server olivia Network share ka shared Restore from C Backups Data folder for new C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 11 MSSQLSERVER MSSQL DATA Logs folder for new C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 11 MSSQLSERVER MSSQL DATA Kill connections to destination database Yes Database pairs Pair 1 AdventureWorks to AdventureWorks Pair 2 LargeDB to new LargeDB Backup options Backup dir backup_root_folder server Max thread count 2
102. ackup Console are compared If they do not match notifications that describe problems appear Update Policy if a policy was changed when a server was not connected If a policy was deployed on this single server you are offered to update server working copy of this policy on the basis of EMS SQL Backup Console configuration The Typical data warehouse maintenance policy on ka server is out of date Do you wish to update this policy If a policy was deployed on several servers you are offered to update this policy on a server or make it independent that is to create a new policy on the basis of EMS SQL Backup Console configuration on this server The System databases maintenance policy on ka server is out of date Update the policy on server C Make this policy independent Policy Name System databases maintenance on ka 1 cancel Hp Install Policy if a policy was created when a server was not connected You are offered to install a server working copy of this policy re Archive databases maintenance policy isn t installed on ka server Do you wish to install this policy now No Help 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 145 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 8 Launches All policy tasks launches are listed in the Launches area on the Servers tab The following information about launches is
103. ackup License through our website option was selected on the first step ES License Activation wizard tio sql2012 Ea Welcome to EMS SQL Backup License Activation wizard Step 2 of 4 Follow these steps to activate EMS SQL Backup license manually 1 Register in the Members Area at https secure sqlmanager net login 2 Open My Registered Products section 3 Expand key list for desired product 4 Choose Activate License action 5 Enter SQL Server instance ID 8801E36400000000 1638 Copy to cipboard into a web form and generate the activation code 6 Copy the generated activation code to Clipboard 7 Click the Next button at this wizard step and paste the activation code into the License Activation Code field 8 Click the Finish button to complete EMS SQL Backup license activation process Finish Cancel To perform license activation via web site follow these steps Register in the Members Area at https secure sqlmanager net login Open My Registered Products section Expand key list for desired product Choose Activate License action Enter automatically generated SQL Server instance ID into a web form and generate the activation code Copy the generated activation code to Clipboard Click the Next button at this Wizard step and paste the activation code into the License Activation Code field at the next step 8 Click the Finish button to complete EMS SQL Backup license process
104. action log options Restore all records of transaction log Restore all records of transaction log before fo 00 00 ea D Restore all records of transaction log up to marked transaction o Mark name Search for marks after 0 00 00 Indude marked transaction Q Kill connections V Check orphaned users Drop orphaned users Hep lt Back WI Backup the transaction log before proceeding with the restore is checked Check this option to perform the tail log backup before the restore Note that the WITH NORECOVERY option will be used in the backup operation so that the database state will be changed to Recovery This guarantees that the database does not change after the tail log backup Note The tail log backup process starts automatically on proceeding to the next step WI Restore tail of log automatically If you check this option the tail log backup file will be added to the backup set for restoring W Replace WITH REPLACE This option specifies that SQL Server database will be overwritten if it exists NW Continue on error This option determines whether the restore operation will be stopped or forced to continue if an error occurs Transaction log options This section is available only if the Transaction log restore type was selected at the Specifying the elements of backup step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 223 EMS SQL Backup Administration cons
105. ages of this chapter are intended to provide you with brief instructions on how to perform this or that operation correctly using EMS SQL Backup Install EMS SQL Backup Install server side components without having permissions for remote installation Activate SQL Server instance Schedule backup database task daily Configure transaction log shipping Monitor server productivity counters Create a policy based on predefined templates Add database server to an existing policy Create a policy rapidly on sevreral servers databases Transfer policy tasks to another set of databases servers Reveal a reason of a failed policy execution Restore successful policy status Convert SQL Server maintenance plan to EMS SQL Backup policy Manage templates effectively Configure policy notifications Create a report on policy execution Ensure simultaneous policy execution on servers from different time zones Update EMS SQL Backup Remove EMS SQL Backup See also Getting Started Servers Policies Templates Activities Maintenance Actions 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 399 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 1 Install EMS SQL Backup EMS SQL Backup consists of two core units SQL Administration Console and Server side components So to perform a full installation and start working with SQL Server in EMS SQL Backup Console you need 1 Install EMS SQL Backup Administration Console 2 Regist
106. ainable databases per SQL Server instance Compressing backup files up to 5 times on any server version Reducing backup time up to 4 times on any server version Backup encryption on any server version Support of Cloud Storages FTP SSL SFTP SSH Windows network folders CIFS Amazon S3 Microsoft Azure Easy to use wizard organizing the log shipping process e Ability to perform 11 types of maintenance tasks including backup log shipping re indexing updating statistics etc Ability to ship databases between SQL Servers by schedule Policy engine to quickly deploy maintenance tasks to multiple servers and to monitor their execution results Centralized monitoring of policies on multiple servers using the user friendly GUI console A high performance multi threaded backup Working with Enterprise and BI versions of SQL Server A set of standard templates for sample maintenance policies of server systems Ability to import tasks of Management Studio for SQL Server Ability to remotely install server components Utility for converting backup files from EMS SQL Backup to SQL Server formats Intelligent Restore Automatic history restore on a chosen date using available backup files Backing up multiple databases to a single file Multiple compression levels to achieve optimal balance between backup size and execution time E mail notification mechanism informing of the task performance results Generating reports on servi
107. alled on other computers you should switch to the new location using the Options Switch Configuration dialogue Q Whether the servers EMS SQL Backup works with must be located within one local network 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 4 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual A Servers can be located anywhere If you are able to connect to your servers using SQL Server Management Studio EMS SQL Backup is able to work with them too Q Do I need to open any additional ports or to enable protocols for working with EMS SQL Backup A It is neither necessary to open additional ports nor enable protocols beyond those already used by your SQL Server Management Studio Q Can I install EMS SQL Backup server components remotely A Yes you can install EMS SQL Backup server components remotely from EMS SQL Backup Console In the Server tree select SQL Server on which you want to install the components and click Install server side EMS SQL Backup Components in the context menu Then follow the instructions of the wizard The following conditions must be met for remote installation v Installing via SQL Server You must have an account with SQL Server System Administrator Privileges such as Sa SQL Server service must be run under an account with Windows Local Administrator Privileges such as LocalSystem v Installing via NETBIOS You must have Windows System Administrator Privileges on
108. ally If you are creating a step template then you can add a database to the list by using the button or Ins key Note The server is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy When you are editing a step on creating a policy from template then if the database s defined on the Selecting database step are missed on the selected server the list of databases will be the following Databases By List z E These databases O qwe 9 master G model G msdb AdventureWorks JA AdventureWorks_20100419 7 DemoDB LargeDB amp new_db m Clean Mismatches Click the Clean Mismatches button to delete the missed databases from the list for the policy cannot be executed for them 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 307 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 1 4 SQL Backup settings This page contains set of specific backup options You can make changes if needed W Backup Database step editor Backup system DB Ss Select a page E 2 Max Thread Count 25 F Name amp description L i General V Compression TE Selection Compression Level 2 X F Encryption Backup file options Verify options 2 Clouds rijndael ox canei Hep Max Thread Count Indicates the number of threads to be used for backup operation Increase the number of threads for faster speed If you are using a multi proces
109. ally from A Quick Maintenance Actions Steps of the Restore Database wizard Selecting available backup Specifying the elements of backup Defining target database parameters Specifying restore options Performing operation See also Backup Database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Shrink Database Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Iransaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 212 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 2 1 Selecting available backup At this step you need to select the backup for database restore F Restore Database step wizard Quick Restore Database step Select backup type and backup source Step 1 of 5 Backup Provider EMS SQL Backup SQL Server Backup Source History Select files Q Server tio sql2014 a o Database Adventureworks X Q Type Storage Network fle 28 05 2015 14 35 01 Full Local 28 05 2015 13 50 58 Full Local 28 05 2015 11 40 46 Full Local Ftp 28 05 2015 11 27 40 Full Local Azure 26 05 2015 17 24 04 Full Local S3 26 05 2015 14 25 43 Full Local 25 05 2015 14 44 32 Full Network folder 25 05 2015 14 19 11 Full Network folder 25 05 2015 14 18 02 Full Local 25 05 2015 12 19 39 Full Sftp 19 05 2015 4 00 03 Differential Local Help lt Back Next gt Run Cancel
110. an Edit Policy lt Back Next gt Finish If there are any errors on conversion you can open the Policy with Edit Policy button to view and correct them Set the Disable Maintenance plan option ON to disable Maintenance Plan in SQL Server Management Studio lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd mm EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 4 4 Operation execution At this step you can view parameters specified on previous steps To complete the operation execution and set the policy on the server click the Finish button Press Finish button to create Policy Step 4 of 4 Verify the choices made in the wizard Create Policy from Maintenance plan Name AdventureWorksBackup Original Maintenance plan will be disabled Service tasks Task Subplan_1 converted from Subplan Add Database Maintenance tasks converted to steps Back Up Database Full Kind Backup Database step Backup Database on Local server connection Databases AdventureWorks Description ps hem oie Destination Disk Schedules Converted subplan s schedule AdventureWorksBac Description Every day at 0 Notification options To operator on server ka lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 12 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 5 Execute policy The policies are execut
111. are and synchronize the contents of your databases Automate your data migrations from development to production database a amp Scroll to top Oracle 89 SQL Management Studio for Oracle EMS SQL Management Studio for Oracle is a complete solution for database administration and development SQL Studio unites the must have tools in one powerful and easy to use environment that will make you more productive than ever before g SQL Manager for Oracle Simplify and automate your database development process design explore and maintain existing databases build compound SQL query statements manage database user rights and manipulate data in different ways ES Data Export for Oracle Export your data to any of 20 most popular data formats including MS Access MS Excel MS Word PDF HTML and more La Data Import for Oracle Import your data from MS Access MS Excel and other popular formats to database tables via user friendly wizard interface a Data Pump for Oracle Migrate from most popular databases MySQL PostgreSQL MySQL DB2 InterBase Firebird etc to Oracle 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Data Generator for Oracle Generate test data for database testing purposes in a simple and direct way Wide range of data generation parameters ee DB Comparer for Oracle Compare and synchronize the structure of your databases Move
112. ask Use for a set of any characters and for any single character in the database name 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual By list This option allows you to select databases manually If you are creating a step template then you can add a database to the list by using the button or Ins key Note The server is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy When you are editing a step on creating a policy from template then if the database s defined on the Selecting database step are missed on the selected server the list of databases will be the following Databases By List 1 E These databases OC VIO awe ME master G model 1 FE msdb FE AdventureWorks FE AdventureWorks_20100419 7 Demods ME Largeds 1 new_db Clean Mismatches Click the Clean Mismatches button to delete the missed databases from the list for the policy cannot be executed for them 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 7 Reorganize Indices Reorganize Indices step editor provides the same set of options as Reorganize Indices wizard The following pages are available in this dialog Name and description General Selection Rebuild options See also Backup database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Int
113. ask 1 Steps Shrink DB Kind Shrink Database Description Shrinks the size of the data files in the databases Reorganize DB indices Kind Reorganize Indices step Description Reorganizes one or more indices for a table in the databases Update DB statistics Kind Update Statistics step Description Updates information about the distribution of key values in the database tables Schedules Saturday night at 1 o dock ee a ee A You can Verify the choices made in the wizard in the corresponding area and click the Finish button to create the task lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 171 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 2 2 Taskeditor The Task editor allows you to view and edit task parameters It provides the same set of options as Service task wizard Task editor tabs Name and description Steps Schedules 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 172 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 2 2 1 Name and description At this section you can view edit task Name and Description 3 Task editor Copy of Backup transaction lo reise Select a page ______ Name Copy of Backup transaction log ipti Description For backup transaction log at hourly routine a Schedules 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 173 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 2 2 2 Steps T
114. ask into Policy 1 At Step 2 of the Create Policy wizard click Create new step button and select Reorganize Indices step type 2 Also you can create a new Step Template for further use selecting Reorganize Indices step at the Templates tab Steps of the Reorganize Indices wizard Naming template Selecting objects Defining rules Advanced options Performing operation See also Backup Database Execute SOL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Shrink Database Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 7 1 Naming step You can name the step using the Name field The Description field can be used to define brief info for the created step re Indices step wizard Reorg Set step name and description Step 1 of 5 The Reorganize Indices step defragments and compacts dustered and non dustered indices on tables and views This will improve index scanning performance In case of rebuild action is activated step reorganizes data on the data and index pages by rebuilding indices Name Reorganize Indices step 1 Description lt Back Next gt This step does not appear for Quick Maintenance Actions Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solution
115. asterCard EuroCard American Express Diners Club Bank Wire Transfer Check or Cash If you have ordered EMS software online and would like to review your order information or if you have questions about ordering payments or shipping procedures please visit our Customer Care Center provided by share it Please note that all of our products are delivered via ESD Electronic Software Delivery only After purchase you will be able to immediately download the registration keys or passwords and download links for archives of full versions Also you will receive a copy of registration keys or passwords by e mail Please make sure to enter a valid e mail address in your order If you have not received the keys within 2 hours please contact us at sales sqlmanager net Note You need to purchase license for every SQL server instance and not for the EMS SQL Backup Console Product distribution EMS SQL Backup Business Regular license 1 Year Maintenance EMS SQL Backup Business Regular license 2 Year Maintenance EMS SQL Backup Business Regular license 3 Year Maintenance EMS SQL Backup Business Pro license 1 Year Maintenance EMS SQL Backup Business Pro license 2 Year Maintenance EMS SQL Backup Business Pro license 3 Year Maintenance EMS SQL Backup Non commercial Regular license 1 Year Maintenance EMS SQL Backup Non commercial Regular license 2 Year Maintenance EMS SQL Backup Non commercial Regular li
116. at will be managed within the utility They include services and stored procedures installed into master database for server maintaining and reviewing EMS SQL Backup Administration Console It is installed locally on the Administrator machine for easy administration of the servers On installation the program installs the console program and configures the repository You need Local system or Local administration permissions to work with server and services Steps Selecting installation type Specifying service account settings Performing operation See also Register Server Wizard Update Remove server side EMS SQL Backup components Update server side components Stand alone local server side components installer Server side components properties Server properties 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 3 1 Selecting installation type At this step of the wizard you need to specify EMS SQL Backup server side components installation type P Eo Installation wizard Install server side components on tio sal2008 X Welcome to the Installation wizard Step 1 of 3 Welcome to the Installation wizard This wizard allows you to install modify or delete EMS SQL Backup server side components Both local and remote operations with the server side components are possible Target version 1 5 0 8355 Remote installation via 5 SQL Server tio sql2008
117. atabases and policies or F5 key A Quick Maintenance Actions open the list of Maintenance Actions for quick launch E Maintenance Policies a Create new Policy 28 Create from Templates to create a policy based on the created template Convert from Maintenance Plan runs the Maintenance plan conversion wizard i Pause All Policies on Server stops policy scheduled execution until resuming a Resume All Policies on Server launches all stopped policies of the server g Show History opens the Viewing Policy History window amp Add to selected object to shortcuts See also Group popup menu Groups popup menu Server popup menu 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 6 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 2 Register Server Wizard This wizard guides you through the server registration To launch the wizard select the Register Server popup menu item in the navigation panel or from the main menu Steps Specifying connection parameters Defining additional options Performing operation See also Install server side EMS SQL Backup Components Update Remove server side EMS SQL Backup components Server side components properties Server properties 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 2 1 Specifying connection parameters This step of the wizard provides you with major set of options needed to register a server a SQL
118. atabases should be backed up All user Select this option to back up user databases only By mask This option allows defining database selection by mask Use for a set of any characters and for any single character in the database name 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 333 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual By list This option allows you to select databases manually If you are creating a step template then you can add a database to the list by using the button or Ins key Note The server is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy When you are editing a step on creating a policy from template then if the database s defined on the Selecting database step are missed on the selected server the list of databases will be the following Databases By List 1 E These databases OC VIO awe ME master G model 1 FE msdb FE AdventureWorks FE AdventureWorks_20100419 7 Demods ME Largeds 1 new_db Clean Mismatches Click the Clean Mismatches button to delete the missed databases from the list for the policy cannot be executed for them 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd su EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 26 Shrink Database Shrink Database step editor provides the same set of options as Shrink Database wizard The following pages are available in this dialog Name_and description General Selecti
119. atabases with low data change rate Z Step Templates Large data warehouse maintenance For large databases with low data change rate 1 Schedule Templates Typical small sized database maintenance For small databases with common data change rate Typical middle sized database maintenance For medium sized databases with common data change rate Edit h Typical large sized database maintenance For large sized databases with common data change rate E Add Small or middle sized OLTP databases maintenance For small or medium sized databases with high data change rate B Edit Large sized OLTP databases maintenance For large sized databases with high data change rate Delete Archive databases maintenance For databases that are periodically updated with a certain amount bl Cleaning logs and deleting obsolete backup files For removing old maintenance logs and unnecessary backup files Order E Ci Custom templates Create your own tempales or done and change preset samples Move Don gt For the system databases master model and msdb 22 User databases maintenance Add New Template __CrleInsert All databases backup 5 Transfer Edit Template EP Export gj Delete Template Ctrl Delete LT Import ch ribs Move Up Clone w Move Down C Export Template cf Import Template C Clone Template fz Processes 0 How to create a new template Proceed to the Templates tab and add new template in the appropriate section How t
120. ated Ee Conversion to Template Convert Policy db_logger to Template Template name db_logger V Save database selection ok Cancel Hep This template will be automatically added to the Policy templates list 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 163 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 2 Task templates The Task Templates page allows you to manage task templates Task template is a preset template containing steps and schedules that can be used for creating new tasks on its basis You can add or edit its settings in the process of task creation ES EMS SQL Backup Administration Console Co le fem th Servers Policies Templates Activities Templates Task Templates View Name Description i Er Preset templates Templates provided by EMS Policy Templates amp Sunday DB backup For backup databases every weekend Task Templates 4 Weekdays differential DB backup For differential backup databases at weekdays Z Step Templates Shrink DB on first Saturday of month For shrink databases every month Schedule Templates amp Backup transaction log For backup transaction log at hourly routine E Ci Cus Create your own tempales or clone and change preset sam Ed it gt gt ask nn ae ang E Add Add New Template Ctri Insert L Edit L Edit Template Lap Delete g Delete Template Ctrl Delete Order z Move Up Move Dow Transfer n oP E
121. ation console User manual 7 2 3 3 Selection This page allows you to edit servers selection for the operation F p Execute T SQL Statement step editor Execute T SQL Statement step 1 X Select a page m noa E Servers Taan ve Version 10 00 5512 Ig Selection W a doom_server tserv2005 Description no description Ae ka me ka sglexpress Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode It is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 323 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 24 History Cleanup History Cleanup step editor provides the same set of options as History Cleanup wizard The following pages are available in this dialog Name and description General Selection See also Backup database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement Database Integrity Check Shrink Database Reorganize Indices Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd sa EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 4 1 Name and description This page allows you to view edit the step name an
122. ation will be saved exported to the specified location 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd ss EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 8 2 Options This tool allows you to customize general options of EMS SQL Backup To open the tool use Environment options EMS SQL Backup Console menu item Security Data refreshing Cloud Connections Proxy 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 382 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 8 2 1 General General options tab allows you to set the security parameters for configuration data and select the EMS SQL Backup Console time zone Fu nn Select a page Home time zone on cer 3 Data refreshing 9 RTz 4 Warning Policies that are scheduled on the basis of the home time zone will be redeployed _ Cloud Connections after home time zone changing w Proxy Local time zone UTC 05 00 Ekaterinburg RTZ 4 V Encrypt configuration data Password aani Confirm password The Home time zone option is used for planning tasks in policies When you first launch the EMS SQL Backup Administration Console its Home time zone equals the time zone set on the machine it was started on If your machine is moved to another time zone the Console time zone is not change automatically You need to switch it using the Home time zone combobox All time zones available in the operation
123. atively to current date The list of databases with integrity check made before this point will be added to log W Transaction log Enable this option to log the list of databases with transaction log free space below the specified limit Free space is less than This option defines transaction log free space limit Log includes list of databases with amount of free space less than this limit Log file is larger than This option adds log file size condition List of databases which transaction log file is larger than the specified limit will be included to log v Data file This option indicates that log should include databases with data file free space below the specified limit Free space is less than Use this option to define the data file free space limit Data file is larger than Use this option to define data file size condition Databases which data file is above this limit will be added to log 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 355 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 9 3 Selection This page allows you to edit database selection to log database parameters ff gt gt o L Database Parameters Logger step editor Database Parameters Logger step 1 Exa Select a page 3 Name amp description TT Databases By List x 7 Eil General 3 aschel
124. aunch via e mail You can specify mailing address and notification level The set notification options will be applied to all service tasks within this policy a C Notify When the policy fails g Send E Mail Ti sql t J lail To as man ne ES ka sqlexpress ager Hep lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Check the necessary servers in the Servers list to send notifications about policy launch results In the Notify field specify the trigger action When the policy succeeds send the message when policy tasks have been successfully completed When the policy fails send the message when policy has failed When the policy completes send the message when policy has been launched Input the recipient email address in the Send E mail To field You can define several e mail addresses separating them with commas SQL Server Agent must be configured to use Database Mail Note Email agent options should be set for the service at Server side components 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 1 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual properties lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 150 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 24 Creating policy At this step of the wizard you can see the summary of all options set at the previous ste ps pe TS es Click the Finish button
125. backup files from the selected server to the local disk of the machine where the EMS SQL Backup Administration Console is running Getting backup files requires server connection only To run this wizard select the Get Backup to Console item in the server popup menu at Servers tab Steps Specifying backup source Selecting backup files Viewing summary information See also Backup Database Wizard Restore Database Wizard 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 106 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 9 1 Specifying backup source On the first step of the wizard you need to specify the backup source and the destination folder on the local machine E Get Backup to Console E Specify backup source and destination folder for backup files Step 1 of 3 Backup Provider EMS SQL Bakup SQLServer Destination folder C Backups Backup Source History Select files Server tio sql2014 Database AdventureWorks x Date Type o 20 01 2015 14 30 12 TransactionLog 20 01 2015 14 29 54 Differential 16 01 2015 10 54 18 Full 14 01 2015 17 24 07 Full 14 01 2015 17 22 30 Full 14 01 2015 17 15 27 Full 14 01 2015 17 12 45 Full 14 01 2015 17 10 13 Full 13 01 2015 16 56 29 Full 13 01 2015 16 51 48 Full 12 01 2015 14 11 57 Full 12 01 2015 14 11 43 TransactionLog Destination Folder Specify the destination server folder where backups will be transferred t
126. base Management Solutions Ltd s6 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Log folder Specify the path for data LDF files for the newly created database Note When creating a template no databases can be selected If the Overwrite option was selected or you have chosen to create a new database then the first stage of the operation is performed immediately on applying settings pressing the OK button On the next step editing the Overwrite option will be reset and the lt Create new gt item will be replaced with the created database name 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 370 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 212 Database Shipping Database Shipping step editor provides the same set of options as Database shipping wizard The following pages are available in this dialog Name_and description General Selection See also Backup database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Shrink Database Reorganize Indices Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 371 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 12 1 Name and description This page allows you to view edit the step name and description Database Shipping tor Database Shipping step 1 Select a page E Name Database S
127. base Parameters Logger step 1 Database Parameters Logger step Options No backup exists Old full backup Last full backup older than 7 day s Integrity check SQL Server 2005 or higher Last integrity check older than 7 day s Transaction log free space Free space is less than 25 Log file is larger than 100 Mb After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Finish button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 276 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 11 Maintenance Cleanup Maintenance Cleanup step allows you to cleanup EMS SQL Backup and SQL Server backups and Maintenance plan reports created by MS SQL Server stored locally on the server or on a remote cloud storage Cleaning MS SQL Server backups is not available for MS SQL Server 2000 To launch the updating operation immediately select Quick Maintenance Actions Maintenance Cleanup popup menu item in the Servers tab To perform scheduled maintenance cleanup on regular basis you need to include this task into Policy 1 At Step 2 of the Create Policy wizard click Create new step button and select Maintenance Cleanup step type 2 Also you can create a new Step Template for further use selecting Maintenance Cleanup step at the Templates tab Steps of the Maintenance Cleanup wizard Naming template Selecting files folders for cleanup Defining cleanup cr
128. ble only on creating back up by means of EMS SQL Backup Backup Database step wizard Backup Database step 1 gt Specify SQL Backup settings Step 4 of 8 Max Thread Count 26 VY Compression Compression Level 2 V Encryption Encryption Password PEER Confirm Password REPERE Encryption Type rijndael v blowfish des Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Max Thread Count Indicates the number of threads to be used for backup operation Increase the number of threads for faster speed If you are using a multi processor system increasing this value can fasten backup speed You are recommended to set one thread fewer than the number of processors Compression Enable the option to compress backup Compression Level Defines backup file compression level Use 1 for best speed and 4 for best compression W Encryption Enable the option to encrypt backup Encryption Password Set password that is used for backup encryption 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 20 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Confirm password Confirm the password specified as an encryption password above Encryption Type Select the encryption algorithm lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 1 5 Setting backup options At this step you can define bac
129. ccess 10 02 2014 10 00 01 10 02 2014 10 00 28 Success 10 02 2014 10 00 25 INF Integrity check for master on local MSSQLSERVER OK 10 02 2014 10 00 26 INF Integrity check for model on local MSSQLSERVER OK 10 02 2014 10 00 28 INF Integrity check for msdb on local MSSQLSERVER OK X EF Current Page 1 Total Pages 5 Zoom Factor 100 Task report is available when a particular task is selected in the Policies area This report displays a detailed information on a task and its steps of the selected policy including task name planned start time started time finished task step status and execution message information warning or error 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 112 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual The Preview window allows you to change the report appearance i e change a document background and add watermarks The man menu of the Preview window allows you to e open page setup dialog e start printing the report e export the content to any of the available formats PDF file HTML file MHT file RTF file Excel file CSV file Text file Image file and then send it via E mail close the Preview window change page layout Facing or Continuous enable disable toolbar enable disable status bar customize toolbar set report background and watermark The toolbar of the Preview window allows you to search for text within the document
130. ce Note that the complete name lt domain_name user_name gt of the User must be given SQL Server login for EMS SQL Backup Service Specify the SQL Server login for EMS SQL Backup Service to connect to the server Afterwards it can be edited using the Server side components Properties dialog Note The specified login must be a member of the system administrator role 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Windows authentication Select this option to connect to the SQL Server through the Windows user account that is specified in the Windows account for EMS SQL Backup Service Log On Note If the Windows login for the specified Windows user account does not exist on the SQL Server it will be created and added to the sysadmin server role Note If you have selected the Local System Windows account as Service Log On and Windows authentication make sure that the NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM login exists on the SQL Server and is a member of the sysadmin role SQL Server authentication EMS SQL Backup identifies user by his server login and password Login and password management is accomplished by Login Manager If Server authentication is selected as the authentication type you should provide authorization settings User and Password Analyzing them a system determines information and therefore object access permissions lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 19
131. ce task results Exporting Service tasks history to an extemal file Unlimited number of remote and local storages for each backup 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 13 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 1 What s new Version Release date EMS SQL Backup 1 8 July 16 2015 What s new in EMS SQL Backup 1 Ability to restore databases from network cloud storages 2 Now it is possible not to store backup files locally and use only network cloud storages for this purpose 3 Ability to delete old backup files from network cloud storages 4 Ability to create tail log backup before restoring a database 5 The Cut Copy Paste features are added to the Policy Editor 6 Some other improvements and bugfixes 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd m EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 2 System requirements EMS SQL Backup Service e Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows 2003 Server Microsoft Windows 2008 Server Microsoft Windows Vista Microsoft Windows 7 Microsoft Windows 8 e SQL Server 2000 SQL Server 2005 SQL Server 2008 SQL Server 2012 SQL Server 2014 e Net Framework 3 5 e 1024 MB RAM or more e 70MB of available HD space for program installation EMS SQL Backup Administration Console e Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows
132. cense 3 Year Maintenance EMS SQL Backup Non commercial Pro license 1 Year Maintenance EMS SQL Backup Non commercial Pro license 2 Year Maintenance EMS SQL Backup Non commercial Pro license 3 Year Maintenance EMS SQL Backup Trial Free version Download Now Register Now EMS Maintenance Program provides the following benefits e Free software bug fixes enhancements updates and upgrades during the maintenance period e Free unlimited communications with technical staff for the purpose of reporting Software failures e Free reasonable number of communications for the purpose of consultation on operational aspects of the software 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual After your maintenance expires you will not be able to update your software or get technical support To protect your investments and have your software up to date you need to renew your maintenance You can easily reinitiate renew your maintenance with our on line speed through Maintenance Reinstatement Renewal Interface After reinitiating renewal you will receive a confirmation e mail with all the necessary information See also How to register EMS SQL Backup 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 18 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 5 How to register SQL Backup The EMS SQL Backup registration is not equal to immediate registration of
133. cess to it Windows account for EMS SQL Backup Service Log On Local System account NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM Select this option to use the LocalSystem Windows account as the Service Log On account This account This option allows using specified system account to run the EMS SQL Backup Service Note that the complete name lt domain_name user_name gt of the User must be given Note EMS SQL Backup Service is common for all instances on the server Therefore in Stand alone local server side components installer changes of Windows account on one instance will be applied on all other instances SQL Server login for EMS SQL Backup Service Specify the SQL Server login for EMS SQL Backup Service to connect to the server Afterwards it can be edited using the Server side components Properties dialog Note The specified login must be a member of the system administrator role Windows authentication Select this option to connect to the SQL Server through the Windows user account that is specified in the Windows account for EMS SQL Backup Service Log On Note If the Windows login for the specified Windows user account does not exist on the SQL Server it will be created and added to the sysadmin server role 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual SQL Server authentication EMS SQL Backup identifies user by his server login and password Login and password manage
134. changes on your development database to production with ease is DB Extract for Oracle Create database backups in the form of SQL scripts save your database structure and table data as a whole or partially re SQL Query for Oracle Analyze and retrieve your data build your queries visually work with query plans build charts based on retrieved data quickly and more Ee Data Comparer for Oracle Compare and synchronize the contents of your databases Automate your data migrations from development to production database T Scroll to top DB2 SQL Management Studio for DB2 EMS SQL Management Studio for DB2 is a complete solution for database administration and development SQL Studio unites the must have tools in one powerful and easy to use environment that will make you more productive than ever before SQL Manager for DB2 Simplify and automate your database development process design explore and maintain existing databases build compound SQL query statements manage database user rights and manipulate data in different ways Data Export for DB2 Export your data to any of 20 most popular data formats including MS Access MS Excel MS Word PDF HTML and more Data Import for DB2 Import your data from MS Access MS Excel and other popular formats to database tables via user friendly wizard interface Data Pump for DB2 Migrate from most popular databases MySQL PostgreSQL Oracle MySQL InterBase Firebir
135. choose the way the service will be updated SQL Server or Network Folder It is recommended to use the SQL Server option if the SQL Server service 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual is running under the account with Administrator privileges or LocalSystem account Network Folder settings This section appears if you have selected the Network folder as a type of remote update Remote resource Select the shared folder that will be used for copying files that are necessary for updating EMS SQL Backup server side components ADMIN or Custom Use the Custom share folder if the ADMIN share does not exist on the remote host For the Custom share you need to specify the following settings Share path Specify the share folder name only without providing its full path for example Shared Share local path Specify the full local path to the shared folder on the remote host for example C Shared Specify the authentication credentials to be used for connection to the shared folder Windows authentication use the current Windows user credentials or This account provide authorization settings User and Password Please make sure that the specified account has access to the shared folder and is a member of the Administrators group on the remote host After all settings are specified click the Check folder button to check the folder existence and ac
136. ck the Update button to start the process Click the Change settings button to configure authentication type and service account settings used for update server side components operation in the Service account settings dialog 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd ss EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 5 1 Service account settings In the Service account settings dialog you need to specify Windows account and SQL Server login for EMS SQL Backup Service In case of remote update you also need to specify the type of update Remote installation via SQL Server Network Folder settings Remote resource ADMINS Custom Share path Shared Share local path C Shared Windows authentication This account User emsdomain tio Password XXXXXXEXLXXX Windows account for EMS SQL Backup Service Log On Local System account NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM This account User Password SQL Server login for EMS SQL Backup Service Windows authentication SQL Server authentication User sa Password pail Note that the specified account must be of a system administrator role These credentials will be used as SOL Server connection parameters for server side components For a remote server
137. ck the Enter button the database table view will be added to the list Any database table view from the list can be edited or x deleted lt lt Previous ste Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 252 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 7 3 Defining rules At this step of the wizard you can set index reorganization rules Se Reorganize Indices step wizard Reorganize Indices step 1 Ee LC Define reorganize index rules Step 3 of5 Reorganize indices if fragmentation level is above 20 Rebuild indices if fragmentation level is above 35 F Compact large objects Reorganize indices if fragmentation level is above Define the fragmentation limits Exceeding this limits considers the indices to be reorganized Rebuild indices if fragmentation level is above Define the fragmentation limits Exceeding this limits considers the indices to be rebuilt W Compact large objects Enable this option to compact image text ntext varchar max nvarchar max varbinary max and xm data lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 253 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 7 4 Advanced options This step of the wizard provides a number of advanced options for index reorganizing 3 Reorganize Indices step wizard Reorganize Indices step 1 Specify advanced options Ste
138. columns In this case column headers are displayed hierarchically and data are grouped by these columns in the order the column headers appear in the Group by area The Group by area popup menu allows you to perform H Full Expand H Full Collapse and Clear Grouping You can disable or enable any column Open the Column Chooser and drag any column header to disable this column from table To add any disabled column drag the header back from the Column Chooser panel to the table 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 152 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Drag a column header here to group by that column Time Manual Status Task A 10 02 2014 14 00 00 Success DB integrity check 2 10 02 2014 153000 ODO pe me 10 02 2014 13 10 00 Message 10 02 2014 13 10 02 INF Prepare SQL Backup 10 02 2014 13 10 02 INF master database backup 10 02 2014 13 10 03 INF master 10 02 2014 1 10 02 2014 13 10 00 10 02 2014 13 00 00 10 02 2014 13 00 00 10 02 2014 12 30 00 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 153 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 10 3 Filtering It is possible to make quick filtering by a specific value or by blank non blank field criteria To activate quick filter press the button in the upper right corner of the column header like at the screenshot below Drag a column header here to group
139. con is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode It is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy Databases and objects All Use this option to select both system and user objects All system This option indicates that only system objects should be selected All user Select this option to select user objects only By mask This option allows defining objects selection by mask Use for a set of any characters and for any single character in the object name By list This option allows you to select objects manually 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd ss EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual If you are creating a step template then you can add a database to the list by using the button or Ins key Note The server is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy When you are editing a step on creating a policy from template then if the database s table s view s defined on the Selecting objects step are missed on the selected server the list of database s table s view s will be the following Databases V These tables Objects Es info Account E These databases 7 O v aw master G model MS msdb V These views WB Adventureworks Je G Adve
140. console User manual Lock Table If this option TABLOCK is used the DBCC CHECKDB statement obtains locks instead of using an internal database snapshot This includes a short term database exclusive lock v All Error Messages This option ALL_ERRORMSGS displays an unlimited number of errors per object vi No Info Messages This option NO_INFOMSGS suppresses all informational messages 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 332 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 5 3 Selection This page allows you to edit objects selection for integrity check fa gt Database Integrity Check step editor System DB integrity check aX E Servers Databases By List Y Name amp description FE ka res Eil General me ka salexpress tabases a Be wos aschel sql2008 VG model JO GEO FE AdventureWorks EE DemoDB Ae hr ME Largeds B orphaned MS TEST OG ve B xtraLargeDB Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode It is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy Databases All Use this option to select both system and user databases All system This option indicates that only system d
141. ction information to support recovery forward from database differential or file backups Set V Remove inactive entries option on to truncate the live transaction log when you create a backup Set Leave in restoring state on to leave the database in restoring state to be unavailable to users until it is completely restored Set Copy only option to create a copy only backup which is a SQL Server backup that is independent of the sequence of conventional SQL Server backups Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode It is selected on applying the 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 306 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Step Template in Policy Databases If EMS SQL Backup provider is used you can select multiple databases in case of SQL Server backup only one database can be specified All Use this option to select both system and user databases All system This option indicates that only system databases should be backed up All user Select this option to back up user databases only By mask This option allows defining database selection by mask Use for a set of any characters and for any single character in the database name By list This option allows you to select databases manu
142. ctions for storing backups Copies of backup files will be uploaded to the specified storages The connections to the following storages are supported e SMB CIFS e FTP e Amazon S3 Cloud e Secure FTP e Microsoft Azure G Backup Database step editor Backup Database step 1 Ss Select a page ne C Add existing connection Cj Create new connection Name amp description General backupsstio A Delete E Selection ED s3 backupsstio Standard Ee SQL Backup settings sig P j aschel shared backupss Delete D Cp RE Os cifs aschel shared backupss User emsdomain tio Verify options You can create a new connection or add an existing one On adding an existing connection you will be offered to choose among connections specified in Cloud Connections tab of the Options dialog To change connection parameters click on its name Depending on connection type the relevant dialog for configuring connection settings will be opened Do not store backup copies locally Check this option to delete backup files from your local disk after successful upload to the cloud storage Note Backup files will not be deleted from the local disk if the upload to at least one specified cloud fails 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 315 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 2 Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute SQL Server Agent job step editor provides the same set of opt
143. d etc to DB2 Data Generator for DB2 Generate test data for database testing purposes in a simple and direct way Wide range of data generation parameters den dad B DB Comparer for DB2 Compare and synchronize the structure of your databases Move changes on your development database to production with ease F DB Extract for DB2 Create database backups in the form of SQL scripts save your database structure and table 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual data as a whole or partially re SQL Query for DB Analyze and retrieve your data build your queries visually work with query plans build charts based on retrieved data quickly and more Data Comparer for DB2 Compare and synchronize the contents of your databases Automate your data migrations from development to production database Scroll to top Tools amp components Advanced Data Export Advanced Data Export Component Suite for Borland Delphi and NET will allow you to save your data in the most popular office programs formats Advanced Data Export NET i Advanced Data Export NET is a component suite for Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 2005 2008 and 2010 that will allow you to save your data in the most popular data formats for the future viewing modification printing or web publication You can export data into MS Access MS Excel MS Word RTF PDF TXT DBF CSV and more The
144. d description History Cleanup step 1 Task name Use this field to name the step Description This field allows you to define step description 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 325 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 4 2 General This page is used to define general options of history cleanup step a 3 History Cleanup step editor History Cleanup step 1 mt Select a page z Select historical data to delete Name amp description mm eServer u Selection V Backup and restore data older than 25 Month s z V History of Server Agent jobs older than 24 Month s EMS SQL Backup V Backup and restore data older than 25 Month s v V Log records of SQL Backup older than 2 Month s MS SQL Server The following options are intended to delete MS SQL backup history and some log info concerning specific jobs performed by MS SQL Server means Backup and restore history data older than Enable the option to clean the history of the MS SQL Server backup and restore operations that are older than specified period of time After cleanup the information about SQL Server type backups performed by EMS SQL Backup or by SQL Server itself will be removed from the server History data of Server Agent job older than Enable the option to clean the history of the SQL Server Agent job s that
145. d description General Notification See also Policy wizard Maintenance plan conversion Execute Policy Resolve problem Viewing Policy History 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 132 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 3 1 Name and description At this section you can view and edit policy name description and time preference Fa gt Policy editor Policy 1 a Select a page Name Policy 1 Description SE General a Notifications In different time zones schedule tasks on basis of Local server time zone Home time zone UTC 05 00 Ekaterinburg RTZ 4 Name Edit policy name in this field Description Edit brief info for the created policy In different time zones schedule tasks on basis of These options specify what time zone is used for policy task launch if its servers are located in different time zones If tasks are to start at specific server time for example when server is idle we recommend to select local server time otherwise select local console time Local server time zone Use this option to launch policy tasks according to the local time on each server Home time zone Use this option to launch policy tasks at the time corresponding to the time zone set in the General options It allows easy control over policy status It is recommended to use 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 1
146. d out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode It is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 32 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 5 Database Integrity Check Database Integrity Check step editor provides the same set of options as Database Integrity Check wizard The following pages are available in this dialog Name_and description General Selection See also Backup database Execute SOL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Shrink Database Reorganize Indices Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 320 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 5 1 Name and description This page allows you to view edit the step name and description System DB integrity check Checks the allocation structural and logical integrity of all the objects in system databases Task name Use this field to name the step Description This field allows you to define step description 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 330 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 5 2 General At this page you can edit g
147. dded object can be opened in its editor afterwards to change some parameters if needed Templates tab contains a list of all predefined templates as well as templates created by user You can Save a template into xml file by selecting the LP Export its context menu item Also you can load saved templates using the of Import button This ability allows copying templates from one EMS SQL Backup configuration to another See also Create a policy based on predefined templates 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 414 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 16 Configure policy notifications You can configure notifications that will inform you about policy execution result via e mail Notification parameters are set on the third step of the policy wizard You need to set an action on which notifications should be sent e When the policy succeeds send the message when policy tasks have been successfully completed e When the policy fails send the message when policy has failed e When the policy completes send the message when policy has been launched In the Send E mail To field enter the e mail address of the administrator that should receive messages generated on policy execution SQL Server Agent must be configured to use Database Mail for sending e mail Note Email agent options should be set for the service at Server side components Properties 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solut
148. ded into one Policy The same server can be included into several solutions To add server to a Solution simply drag and drop it from the group to a solution folder You can change objects order dragging them within the Explorer tree Shortcuts This panel is used for quick access to the groups servers databases To add a object to the Shortcuts list use the corresponding menu item from the server database popup menu Shift Insert or drag the object to the Shortcuts Troubled servers This panel displays servers which have problem policies You can review the servers and resolve the problems 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Overall status It shows the status of the selected server information about SQL Server and EMS SQL Backup Server side components installed on the server and policies summary Policies are successful there is a connection to the server and all polices have been executed successfully There are no policies there is a connection to the server but no policies are created Server isn t connected there is no connection to the server Backup service isn t installed service components are not installed on the server Policies have problems there have been some errors on policy execution You can resolve the problems using the Resolve the problem option Some of policies have unknown status status for some of the pol
149. ding Custom 10 02 2014 14 00 00 4 Missed DB inte Clear Sorting 10 02 2014 13 30 00 i Success Shrink rise from 09 02 2014 Success Group By This Column 10 02 2014 13 10 00 0 00 00 t sens e Time Result Step Message ES Group By Box W 2002 2014 i 10 02 2014 g Column Chooser 3 5O 13 10 02 INF 23 59 59 ea Best Fit Apply backup OK Y Clear Filter 10 02 2014 5 Filter Editor Export 10 02 2014 1 Success Badup sys 13 10 02INF Y CR Export to HTML backup E Export to Text 10 02 2014 13 10 03 INF master 10 02 2014 13 00 00 10 02 2014 12 30 00 2 F1 Server ka Records 42 The Refresh function F5 updates the list of launches The Auto refresh mode sets automatic refreshing on The window is refreshed when the new event is added to the log Filter output One day Information concerning policy launches performed not later than one day ago from the current date and time will be displayed One week Information concerned policy launches performed not later than one week ago from the 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 1 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual current date and time will be displayed 2 Custom Enables setting date and time criteria In
150. e Verify backup when finished VERIFYONLY Name amp description Eil General T Selection amp SQL Backup settings l Backup file options V Perform checksum CHECKSUM erifies the page page che cA gt Clouds V Verify backup when finished VERIFY ONLY Check this option to enable backup verification Verifying a backup checks that the backup is intact physically to ensure that all the files in the backup are readable and can be restored and that you can restore your backup in the event you need to use it Perform checksum before writing to media CHECKSUM This option enables disables checksum verification before writing to the backup media Before writing a page to the backup media BACKUP verifies the page if this information is presented on the page BACKUP generates a separate backup checksum for the backup streams Restore operations can optionally use the backup checksum to validate that the backup is not corrupted The backup checksum can optionally be used at restore time Using backup checksums may affect workload and backup throughput W Continue on error This option determines whether the backup operation will be stopped or forced to continue despite encountering errors such as invalid checksums or torn pages 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd sa EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 1 9 Clouds Use this tab to set cloud conne
151. e Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Wizard steps Set service task name and description Define a set of steps for service task Define a schedule for service task Task creating 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 166 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 2 1 1 Set service task name and description At this step you need to specify Name and Description for the task being created Set service task name and description Step 1 of 4 This wizard will guide you through creating a task that SQL Backup can run on a regular basis You can schedule such routine database administration steps as checking integrity maintaining indices backing up databases updating database statistics shrinking databases etc The created task can be edited in SQL Backup Administration console you can add new steps redefine schedules and manage task execution Name Service task 1 Description lt Back Next gt Finish Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 167 5 2 1 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Define a set of steps for service task Use this step of the wizard to build a list of steps in execution order to be performed on task launch 4 Service task wizard Service task 1 Define a set of steps for service task Step 2 of 4 Steps in execution order
152. e can fasten backup speed You are recommended to set one thread fewer than the number of processors Compression Enable the option to compress backup 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 373 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Compression Level Defines backup file compression level Use 1 for best speed and 4 for best compression WI Encryption Enable the option to encrypt backup Encryption Password Set password that is used for backup encryption Confirm password Confirm the password specified as an encryption password above Encryption Type Select the encryption algorithm Network shared folder Specify the backup shared folder for copying full backups of the source database Both source and destination servers should have access to this folder otherwise database shipping cannot be performed Click the Check button to make sure that the folder is accessible by both servers Destination folder Specify the destination server folder where backups will be shipped to This folder is set relatively to the destination server Recovery options This group of options allows you to specify the recovery options to be applied to the restore operation No recovery leaves the database in the restoring state This option specifies that the restore operation does not roll back any uncommitted transactions NB When this option is selected the database is not usable in this intermediate no
153. e perform the following steps 1 select the Activate license item of the server popup menu to run the License Activation Wizard 2 select the preferable license activation method and complete the set of wizard steps 3 make sure that the activation process has been completed successfully check the license information in the overall status window and license must become Active in the Members Area Steps Selecting license activation method Entering license key Performing online activation Web site activation Entering license activation code Completing operation See also Purchasing License deactivation 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 5 1 1 Selecting license activation method Use this step to set license activation method E License Activation wizard tio sql2012 ee Welcome to EMS SQL Backup License Activation wizard Step 1 of 4 This wizard is used to activate EMS SQL Backup product license It is assumed that you have already purchased a product license and that you have the license information available If you cannot find license information please visit your Member Account https secure sqlmanager net member subscribe Select one of the following activation methods Activate EMS SQL Backup License online Use this option if you have Internet connection Product license will be activated automatically within a f
154. e Plans created by SQL Server Management Studio f ry ey Choose Maintenance Plan to convert to Policy Step 2 of 4 These Maintenance Plans are found on server ka Name Description Owner Created LS CT He backup EMSDOMAIN tio 21 08 2013 P TestDbCheck EMSDOMAIN tio 10 02 2014 Ke ShrinkDB EMSDOMAIN tio 10 02 2014 le all EMSDOMAIN tio 05 02 2014 lt Back Next gt Finish You need to select one of the Maintenance Plans to be converted into Policy The conversion will be performed at the next step Note that this function is only available if SQL Server Integration Services are installed on the server lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 10 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 443 Performing conversion At this step the selected Maintenance Plan is being converted to Policy Check conversion results Step 3 of 4 Conversion AdventureWorksBackup on ka server Description i Found Maintenance SubPlan Subplan_1 A Back Up Database Full backup task is converted to backup step and it will create backups of the EMS SQL Backup format i Back Up Database Full task successfully converted i Subplan_1 successfully converted A AdventureWorksBackup Maintenance plan logging options are ignored see EMS SQL Backup Service log instead 7 Disable Maintenance pl
155. e Remove Server side components wizard will be launched automatically after server is registered lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 2 3 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start the process Click Finish to start the operation Step 3 of 3 Verify the choices made in the wizard Register SQL Server Instance aschel sgl2008 Description Opitonal server description here Authentication SQL Server Login tester Timeout 30 sec Reconnect on Console startup Yes Connect to Server after registration Yes Install SQL Backup server side components Yes vee Ema eon Press the Finish button to register the server lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 3 Install server side SQL Backup components EMS SQL Backup utility consists of two parts server side components and GUI administration console To start working with EMS SQL Backup you need to install server side components To run the installation wizard select the Install server side EMS SQL Backup Components item in the server popup menu at Servers tab Server side components They are installed locally or remotely on all MS SQL server instances th
156. e Server side Components Properties dialog Finish Cancel Backup folder Specify backup destination directory For your convenience backup_root_folder and server tags are provided The directory which the backup_root_folder tag stands for is configured in the Server side components Properties dialog You can check availability of the defined folder by clicking the corresponding button Note The Check button is available only if backup is configured on a single server Backup file name Define backup file name Type backup file name manually or form it using variables For your convenience server database backup_type date and login tags are provided If you want to upload backup file to an external storage it is recommended to use the date tag for the backup file to have a unique name Note To insert a tag in the field simply click it in the list of Available tags Backup to a single file Select this option to backup all selected databases to a single file 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 25 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Backup to several files This option indicates that backup should be split into several files Splitting the backup can in some cases speed up the backup process Split by size Indicates that backup file will be split to volumes of the specified size Split by database Indicates that each database will be backed up into a s
157. e from the chain If the backup file includes several databases you are only allowed to select one database at a time For every selected file displays additional information Date Database Type Encrypted First LSN Storage name Last LSN Check Point LSN Differential Base LSN x Remove Removes the selected file from the list Li Clear Removes all files from the list After you have added the necessary files manually click the Next button to proceed to the Viewing summary information step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 108 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 9 2 Selecting backup files This step allows you to select files to be transferred to the local disk This step is not available if Files has been selected as backup source at the previous step The order is generating automatically Specify necessary backup files for transferring 20 01 2015 14 30 12 tio sql2014 AdventureWorks Step 2 of 3 Date Type Encrypted Storage name First LSN Last LSN V 16 01 2015 10 54 18 Full False C Backups SQL2014 SQL20 4635000000 107200043 4635000000111200001 J 20 01 2015 14 29 54 Differential False C Backups SQL2014 SQL20 4635000000 113600034 4635000000 11680000 1 V 20 01 2015 14 30 12 MransactionLog False C Backups SQL2014 SQL20 463500000009760000 1 4635000000 11680000 1 m After you have selected the
158. e shared folder Windows authentication use the current Windows user credentials or This account provide authorization settings User and Password Please make sure that the specified account has access to the shared folder and is a member of the Administrators group on the remote host After all settings are specified click the Check folder button to check the folder existence and access to it Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 3 2 Specifying service account settings At this step you should specify Windows account and SQL Server login for EMS SQL Backup Service Eo Installation wizard Install server side components on tio sql2008 E4 Specify Windows and SQL Server accounts for EMS SQL Backup Service Step 2 of 3 Windows account for EMS SQL Backup Service Log On Local System account NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM This account User Password SQL Server login for EMS SQL Backup Service Windows authentication parameters for server side components Help lt Back Next gt Install Cancel Windows account for EMS SQL Backup Service Log On Local System account NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM Select this option to use the LocalSystem Windows account as the Service Log On account This account This option allows using specified system account to run the EMS SQL Backup Servi
159. e the step using the Name field The Description field can be used to define brief info for the created step Execute T SQL Statement step wizard Execute T SQL Statement step 1 Set step name and description Step 1 of 4 The Execute T SQL Statement step allows you to run any custom statement as a part of a service task It provides most common way to perform maintenance operations Name Execute T SQL Statement step 1 Description lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel This step does not appear for Quick Maintenance Actions Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 231 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 4 2 Selecting server Use this step of the wizard to select server s for T SQL statement execution Execute T SQL Statement step wizard Execute T SQL Statement step 1 z Choose servers where T SQL statement will be executed Step 2 of 4 E Servers Je ka Version 10 00 5512 je aschel sql2008 Description no description 18 ka sglexpress TE dean_winxp sql2008r2 T ve doom_server tserv2005 MG deimos sal2012 e olivia ce aa Ge me Co Servers Select the servers to execute the T SQL statement on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode Server description and version are displayed on the
160. eaned Folder Set the search folder for the files The path is set relatively to the server which you selected in the Server list If the MS SQL Server has been selected as a Backup provider then you can define the path and name of the specific backup File to be deleted Extension Specify the custom extension for backup or report files if it differs from the default Enable Include subfolders Y Include first level subfolders option if you need to clean up all sub folders of the specified folder File type Use this drop down list to specify the the type of files to be deleted e Backups backup files e Reports text reports of previously run maintenance plans Note This drop down list is available if the MS SQL Server has been selected as a Provider Cloud storage 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 20 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Eo Define items to clear axe Location Server Cloud storage All files by mask bkp Add existing connection Create new connection backupssto E Delete s3 backupsstest test Standard ok cancel Hep Here you need to specify the cloud storage where you want to delete backup files You can create a new connection or add an existing one On adding an existing connection you will be offered to choose among connections specified in Cloud Connections tab of the Options dialog If you create a new connectio
161. eate New Policy gt a Create Policy from Template ep Edit Policy pgp Delete Policy gy Create Template from Policy Q Show History 2 Create New Policy Create Policy from Template create a policy based on the existing policy template 22 Edit policy oat Delete policy 4 Create Template from Policy create a template with the same tasks and settings as the selected one Show History open Policy history viewer 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd ne EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 1 2 Task popup menu The following actions can be applied to the task i Add Task a Add Task from Template 2 Edit Task Remove Task La ie Expand All Collapse All e Show History Copy 3 Paste 4 Add New Task to the policy t Add Task from Template create a task based on the existing task template amp Edit Task using the Task editor st Remove Task from the policy ge Expand all tasks t Collapse all tasks Show History open task history in Policy history viewer Copy the selected task Cut the selected task Paste the copied cut task 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd no EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 1 3 Step context menu The following actions can be applied to the step F Add Step a Add Step from Template 73 Edit Step J Remove Step ie Expand All Collapse All
162. eceeeeeeeee seen ee ee seen ee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeesesseeeeeeseeeeeeesseneneees 414 Create a report on policy EXECUTION ss nnssssnnerrrnennenennnnnneenennnnenennnnnenee 415 Ensure simultaneous policy execution on servers from different time zones 0000 416 Report bugs and suggestions nnneennnennnnnnnennnnnnneenennnnennennnnee 417 Update EMS SQL Backup ccccceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeenseesseeees 418 Remove EMS SQL Backup ccceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeeeeeseesaneess 419 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 9 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Use Free version of EMS SQL Backup ss nsnssnnneenennnnennennnnennnennnne 420 Part X Appendix 422 Database States 0r s tin Monnier EEDA AE PE none ae coadecezcedaudencencs jettedasseceuadsaettedaes 422 Backup Converter Utility cceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeeeeneeesaeeees 423 Server folder dialog isc cteioveceesssveca de REE rent eme tete dt hai ANa dune 424 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 12 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 Welcome to EMS SQL Backup EMS SQL Backup is a powerful tool for SQL server database administration and maintenance Visit our web site for details http www sqlmanager net Features e Unlimited number of maint
163. ecting files manually Specifying the elements Of DACKUUP 2 ccs can ces csceeazissesscoyoesinsacfeneaetsensesotienstitusisttuecnqtaseuecsstsusvicvnesdstnagiazeatenteeteas 217 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 6 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Defining target database parameters iii 219 Specifying restore Opi OS 5 LA MER TR ARR A nee de nee a a raaraa oie raai 221 Performing Op ration sas an td dec encudcusticay tase te nn detre nr en nee sie dsii anna 224 Execute SQL Server Agent job ta en neue 225 NAN STEP LEE eh tei ST tn a A RS ee A dct M A en en Na OG ab Selecting job Performng O0p rAON ESA ein tin seen ie Execute T SQL statement Naming Stepi Er tess eds oon cin NE even Bee A nn ne tn Rte A Gta ne SEEC ting SOVETA ea oe sc dics An aaae dt rt n nes nn re nn tn ee An Defining T SQL statement Performng Op ratiOnNsr th tn d Mah etude ieeits aaa i e a Ra History Cle ANU cceststssessessesseeseeeseeseeseesaessesseseuseveevseesneaeeseeseesaesaesaesaeesessoesoesaesaesaesaevaevanvaneaneanesauseesaesansaneneaes Nan SCD ST sida tengead shseasivecaatnusiatdvandevs din ET DEIECUING S V RE NAN Re ne ee ne ne S lectinghistoriCal datas as irrar Mn dt segnteiisabcadsanaslequehasedtaatssaganscaidestien aecadserastzuegignies a E a Performing Op ration 28 sie Sees a a A A E te AEEA e EREE Database Integrity Check Naming step Selecting databases Sae NoT E E T A nt nn LEE Perf
164. ed the task will be executed and the overall policy status will be changed to the actual result status after execution gen00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000 0000000000000000000000000000 000 ou There are two options that can be applied to the policy to correct the errors Mark problem task launches as ignored ignore status of erroneous task s Run problem task s execute the erroneous task s immediately See also Policy wizard Policy editor Maintenance plan conversion Execute Policy Viewing Policy History 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 18 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 10 Viewing Policy History This chapter describes the way you can view history of policy launches To view the history use the F Show history item from the object popup menu You can call this viewer for the group of servers server specific launch or policy The main frame of this dialog contains a table with complete information about policy launches launch date status task name policy server policy status result message This table is customizable you can change columns set swap columns set filtering and grouping eh eS Filter output Drag a column header here to group by that column One day Ml fel Bn sous Sort Ascending One 2 D One w 10 02 2014 14 10 00 Missed Backup Z Sot Descen
165. ed automatically in accordance with the schedule s specified for it If needed you can launch the policy manually at the Servers tab At the Servers tab select the policy to be executed in the Policies section and use the FS Execute Policy item from the popup menu or double click the policy If the policy is deployed on several servers you will be prompted to select the servers for policy execution amp Select servers x Policy System databases maintenance is deployed on several servers Please select which servers it should be launched on 1 He doom_server tserv2005 The information about current execution is available at Activities page and about all launches at the Policy History viewer See also Policy wizard Policy editor Maintenance plan conversion Resolve problem Viewing Policy History 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 1 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 6 Policy status Waiting the task has not been performed yet and it is waiting for its launch time Success the task has been successfully completed Warning the task has been completed with some minor errors Warnings include out of range parameters for Database Parameters Logger and some warnings on execution that do not affect the final result Fail the task execution has failed Executing the task is being executed at the moment Aborted the execution of the task has been cancelled
166. egrity Check Shrink Database Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 340 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 7 1 Name and description This page allows you to view edit the step name and description Reorganize DB indices Reorganizes one or more indices for a table in the databases Task name Use this field to name the step Description This field allows you to define step description 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 341 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 7 2 General At this page you can edit general options of the step fl 4 Reorganize Indices step editor Reorganize DB indices ms Select a page m Reorganize indices if fragmentation level is above Name amp description Rebuild indices if fragmentation level is above 30 T Selection E Compact large objects Rebuild options Reorganize indices if fragmentation level is above Define the fragmentation limits Exceeding this limits considers the indices to be reorganized Rebuild indices if fragmentation level is above Define the fragmentation limits Exceeding this limits considers the indices to be rebuilt Compact large objects Enable this option to compact image text ntext varchar max nvarchar max
167. emain intact and the new backup is written after the end of the last backup on the media v Backup compression This option enables backup compression overriding the server level default for SQL Server 2008 Enterprise and later versions If necessary you can set a Password for the backup enter the password twice in the respective edit fields 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 312 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 1 7 Additional options This tab is only available if backup is performed with SQL Server provider G Backup Database step editor Backup Database step 1 Lx Select a page ps Data transfer options Name amp description i General Buffer count O ton TE Selection Max transfer size KB o jis gt Backup file options Options Verify options 1 Clouds Buffer count Specifies the total number of I O buffers to be used for the backup operation Max transfer size KB Specifies the largest unit of transfer in bytes to be used between SQL Server and the backup media The maximum value is 4096 kb Note If specified value is 0 then the default value is used 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 313 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 1 8 Verify options At this page you can define backup verifying options G Backup Database step editor Backup system DB Se Select a pag
168. emote folder does not exist it will be created on performing test access 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd su EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 8 2 3 5 Microsoft Azure Cloud The Azure Connection Settings dialog is provided for configuring connection to Microsoft Azure BLOB storage container for uploading backup files ES Azure Connection Settings xs Name testing Account name testing Account key XXXKXELXELELRELXELEXELELELLLEELELEELERELELEXELELEXELELXELXELELXEX XXELLLLLLELLELELELXELEEXEEXELXEEEXXX Container root Q Timeout sec 90 Name Specify the name for the connection The connection name must be unique among all that were already created Account Name Enter a name of the Microsoft Azure storage account The storage account name forms the subdomain of the BLOB object URL address Account key Enter the storage access key Both primary and secondary key can be used Container Every blob in Azure storage resides in a container Use the drop down list to select the container among existing ones You can enter any new valid container name as well To view container naming rules hove the icon Timeout sec Specify the timeout in seconds when a connection will be timed out because of inactivity on the data channel If the server timeout interval elapses before the service has finished processing the request the service returns an
169. eneral options of the step a Database Integrity Check step editor System DB integrity check Select a page V Indude Indices Name amp description a T Limited Checking E Selection Limited checking options Exdusive access options Physical Only Snapshot Data Purity Lock Table All Error Messages T No Info Messages W Include Indices The option indicates that indices are included in database integrity check WI Limited Checking Use this option if you need to restrict database integrity check Physical Only This option PHYSICAL_ONLY limits the checking operation to the integrity of the physical structure of the page and record headers the physical structure of B trees and the allocation consistency of the database Designed to provide a small overhead check of the physical consistency of the database this check can also detect torn pages checksum failures and common hardware failures that can compromise a user s data Data Purity If this option DATA_PURITY is enabled the DBCC CHECKDB statement checks the database for column values that are not valid or out of range Exclusive access options limits the checks that are performed Snapshot Enable the option to use an internal database snapshot for the transactional consistency needed to perform database integrity checks 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 331 EMS SQL Backup Administration
170. ense type 4 Complete the wizard steps The list of all functional differences between EMS SQL Backup versions can be found in the Feature Matrix 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 42 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 10 Appendix 10 1 Database states The general database status includes SQL Server database state the database icon color or right bottom comer icon and policy status the color of a shield in the left top corner database i database i database i database i D in an emergency state and does not have policies in an emergency state and all policies have succeeded status in an emergency state and has failed policies in an emergency state and has some warnings on policy execution nn Ga database i database i database i database i offline and does not have policies offline and all policies have succeeded status offline and has failed policies offline and has some warnings on policy execution ne SEEP CSCO database i database i database i database i D online and does not have policies online and all policies have succeeded status online and has failed policies online and has some warnings on policy execution DW s in s in s in s in database database database database single user mode and does not have policies single user mode and all policies have succeeded status single use
171. ent Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 1 6 SQL Server 7 1 1 6 1 Setting backup options for incremental backup For SQL Server backups the additional step of the wizard becomes available Q Backup Database step wizard Quick Backup Database step Set other backup options Step 4 of 8 Data transfer options Buffer count ou Max transfer size KB ol Help l lt Back i Ru Cancel Buffer count Specifies the total number of I O buffers to be used for the backup operation Max transfer size KB Specifies the largest unit of transfer in bytes to be used between SQL Server and the backup media Note If specified value is 0 then the default value is used 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 24 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 1 7 Setting file options Use this step to define backup file options F Backup Database step wizard Backup Database step 1 gt s Specify SQL Backup file options Step 5 of 8 Backup folder backup_root_folder server check Available tags backup root folder server Backup file name server _ database _ backup_type _ date bkp Available tags server database backup type date login Backup to a single file Backup to several files Split by size i 22 eB Split by database Note backup_root_ folder can be configured in th
172. entication requires authorization information User Name and Password Timeout Use this option to restrict time in seconds for EMS SQL Backup to connect to server Test connection You can test specified connection settings by pressing this button 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 96 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Server options 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 7 2 Server options The Server options section allows you to set additional options for the database 1 Server properties aschel sql2008 xm Select a page Description Opitonal server description here a LA SQL Server connection info LA V Connect automatically on Console startup Description field is used for comment on the server W Connect automatically on Console startup This option defines whether connection to the registered server should be performed on startup Server connection info 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 98 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 8 Server side components properties Server side components properties window displays settings that have been defined on server side components installation and email settings for correct sending of policy notifications To open it use server s Server side components properties context menu ite
173. eparate file lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 26 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 1 8 Specifying backup verifying options Use this step to configure backup verifying options p Backup Database step wizard Backup Database step 1 Specify backup verifying options Step 6 of 8 V Verify backup when finished VERIFYONLY V Perform checksum CHECKSUM gt Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel V Verify backup when finished VERIFY ONLY Check this option to enable backup verification Verifying a backup checks that the backup is intact physically to ensure that all the files in the backup are readable and can be restored and that you can restore your backup in the event you need to use it Perform checksum before writing to media CHECKSUM This option enables disables checksum verification before writing to the backup media Before writing a page to the backup media BACKUP verifies the page if this information is presented on the page BACKUP generates a separate backup checksum for the backup streams Restore operations can optionally use the backup checksum to validate that the backup is not corrupted The backup checksum can optionally be used at restore time Using backup checksums may affect workload and backup throughput W Continue on error This option determines whether the backup operatio
174. er server using the Register Server Wizard To launch it use the Register Server context menu item of the Server Explorer 3 Connect to the server using the Connect item of its context menu 4 After server registration you need to install server side components To launch the Install server side EMS SQL Backup components use the Install server side EMS SQL Backup Components server context menu item 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 40 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 2 Install server side components without having permissions for remote installation If you do not have permissions for a remote installation of server side components using Install server side EMS SQL Backup components you can install them locally on the server using the Stand alone remote components Installer In order to perform server side components installation locally on the server do the following 1 copy EMS SQL Backup setup file to the server machine 2 launch the EMS SQL Backup setup wizard and choose the Server side only mode on the third step 3 after the EMS SQL Backup Setup wizard is finished the Stand alone remote components Installer is launched automatically 4 follow the steps of the wizard in compliance with Stand alone remote components Installer topic Note The EMS SQL Backup setup wizard installs EMS SQL Backup Service Installer application InstallWizard exe which allows installing
175. er tree Q Can I execute multiple policies simultaneously on one server A Several policies can be deployed to a single server their runtime can be the same and the execution time can intersect However 2 tasks of backup recovery log shipping can not be executed simultaneously on a single SQL Server instance Q Ihave setup SQL Server maintenance plans Can I use them in EMS SQL Backup A You can convert SQL Server maintenance plans into EMS SQL Backup policies using the Maintenance Plan Conversion Wizard Maintenance Policies Convert from Maintenance Plan context menu of the Server tree Q How does EMS SQL Backup notify about a policy execution failure A EMS SQL Backup has the e mail notification mechanism informing of the policy execution results Also EMS SQL Backup Console displays statuses and results of policies while connecting to a server Q Can I monitor manage my set of servers using two three different installed on different computers consoles A Yes you can However your EMS SQL Backup Console configuration must be accessible to all your computers The configuration can be stored both in a file and ina database on any SQL Server In this case it is recommended to store the configuration on SQL Server To change the configuration storage location call Options Save Configuration specify a new location and enable the Switch to saved configuration option to use a new location In EMS SQL Backup Console inst
176. er use selecting Backup Database step type at the Templates tab Note To restore a database from backup use Restore Database wizard Steps of the Backup Database wizard Naming template Selecting database provider Selecting database Defining EMS SQL Backup settings Setting backup options Setting file options Specifying backup verifying options Performing operation See also Restore Database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Shrink Database Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 194 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 1 1 Naming step You can name the step using the Name field The Description field can be used to define brief info for the created step p Database step wizard Backup Database step 1 Set step name and description Step 1 of 8 The Backup Database step allows you to perform full differential backup or backup transaction log operation on selected databases to given destination files or devices with specified options for a backup Name Backup Database step 1 Description cs lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel This step is skipped for Quick Maintenance Actions Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 105
177. eration is complete you will be automatically redirected to the final step If problems occurred on deactivating the previous license key on the EMS activation server you will be redirected to the Web site deactivation step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 5 1 6 Completing operation This step is intended to inform you about the product activation status Enter the license activation code Step 2 of 2 Verify the process result Activation of the product Registration Succeed Info Registered successfully Click the Finish button to complete the operation 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 5 2 License deactivation Suppose you have decided to move a license from one instance to another In this case at first you need to deactivate this license key and after that activate it on another instance The deactivation operation is performed by means of the License Deactivation Wizard Your license key will be deactivated and EMS SQL Backup Service will not work with this SQL Server instance After deactivation this Wizard informs EMS that this license key is deactivated and you will be able to activate it on another SQL Server instance To deactivate your license perform the following steps 1 select the Deactivate license item of the server popup menu t
178. erify the choices made in the wizard Step Name Reorganize Indices step 1 Kind Reorganize Indices step Database objects selection doom_server tserv2005 In those databases Select All Tables LargeDB DemoDB AdventureWorks Rules Reorganize indices if fragmentation level is above 20 Rebuild indices online if fragmentation level is above 35 Options Reorganize pages with the default amount of free space Compact large objects Pad index Sort results in tempdb Ignore duplicate keys Keep index online while reindexing 8588856 After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Finish button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 256 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 8 Shrink Database Shrink Database step allows you to perform database shrinking the DBCC SHRINKDATABASE and SHRINKFILE Transact SQL statements are issued This operation is used to reduce any file within the database to remove unused pages Both data and transaction log files can be reduced or shrunk To launch the shrinking operation immediately select A Quick Maintenance Actions i Shrink Database popup menu itemin the Servers tab To perform scheduled shrinking on regular basis you need to include this task into Policy 1 At Step 2 of the Create Policy wizard click Create new step button and select Shrink Database step type 2 Also you can create a
179. erver side components via Network shared folder Remote resource 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Select the shared folder that will be used for copying files that are necessary for updating removing EMS SQL Backup server side components ADMINS or Custom Use the Custom share folder if the ADMIN share does not exist on the remote host For the Custom share you need to specify the following settings Share path Specify the share folder name only without providing its full path for example Shared Share local path Specify the full local path to the shared folder on the remote host for example C Shared Specify the authentication credentials to be used for connection to the shared folder Windows authentication use the current Windows user credentials or This account provide authorization settings User and Password Please make sure that the specified account has access to the shared folder and is a member of the Administrators group on the remote host After all settings are specified click the Check folder button to check the folder existence and access to it Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 4 2 Selecting operation type Use this step of the wizard to select the required operation ES Installation wizard Update server
180. erver via shipping to the network share folder The wizard will guide you through the process of selecting databases and setting up shipping options Name Log Shipping step 1 Description cs Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 25 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 12 2 Specifying database pairs At this step you need to set database pair for transaction log shipping amp Log Shipping step wizard Log Shipping step 1 Specify database pairs Step 2 of 5 Source server Destination server doom_server tserv2005 z olivia X Source DB Destination DB Overwrite New database LE lt None gt CE PS PE DemoDB lt None gt V i lt Create new gt T pe orphaned lt None gt v TEST lt None gt W TestDB lt Create new gt W TestDB ves lt None gt W xtraLargeDB lt None gt W J Data folder C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 11 MSSQLSERVER MSSQL DATA f Log folder C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 11 MSSQLSERVER MSSQL DATA f He CG e F Gone Source server Select the server where the database that you want to back up to another server is located Destination server Select the server where transaction logs are shipped to from the drop down list Set the database pairs in the grid The backups of transaction logs are performed on the source server and restored on the destinati
181. es is allowed while reindexing 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 345 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 28 Update Statistics Update Statistics step editor provides the same set of options as Update Statistics wizard The following pages are available in this dialog Name_and description General Selection See also Backup database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SOL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Shrink Database Reorganize Indices Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s6 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 8 1 Name and description This page allows you to view edit the step name and description Update DB statistics Updates information about the distribution of key values in the database tables Task name Use this field to name the step Description This field allows you to define step description 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 347 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 8 2 General At this page you can edit general options of Update Statistics step 5 4 Update Statistics step editor Update DB statistics Select a page a Update Name amp description ace mj 1 a Column statistics only Index sta
182. es not have access to server Why does it happen A This error occurs when SQL Server Agent receives wrong information about the user privileges set of NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM that is the owner of the executing task The problem can be solved in one of the following ways v Change EMS SQL Backup service account to any other one that has all the task run privileges on the server Recreate a policy v Change the owner of SqlBackup_XXXXXXXX_Task to another user having the 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd a EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual permissions to run tasks v If BUILTIN Administrators account was removed from the server restore it using the administrator privileges What are the differences between different versions of EMS SQL Backup You can view the list of all functional differences between EMS SQL Backup versions in the Feature Matrix gt May I not pay the program maintenance The basic price of EMS SQL Backup includes 1 Year Maintenance Once the Maintenance term expires you will be able to continue using the software without any limitations however you won t have access to any product updates released after your maintenance expiration date gt Q I get the Access is denied error on trying to install EMS SQL Backup server side components via Network Folder How can I fix the problem A First of all make sure that the specified account has local Administra
183. es that statistics will be gathered using an inherited sampling ratio for all existing statistics including indexes If the sampling ratio results in too few rows being sampled SQL Server automatically corrects the sampling based on the number of existing rows in the table or view 7 No recompute Disable the option to recompute statistics that become out of date automatically lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 268 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 9 4 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start updating statistics Update ics step wizard Update step 1 Click Finish to create step item Step 4 of 4 Verify the choices made in the wizard Step Name Update Statistics step 1 Kind Update Statistics step Database objects selection ka In those databases Select All Tables AdventureWorks doom_server tserv2005 In those databases Select All Tables and Views AdventureWorks DemoDB LargeDB Options Update All existing statistics Perform Sampling to 10 With No recompute No After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Finish button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 260 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 10 Database
184. essessessevsevsevseeseeseesnesaeseesaesaesauseessessoeseesausaesaevaeuaevanvaneaneanennesnesaesansaneoneaes 302 Name and description 303 Generali raray an e A dies et ps eee Non N A hci ade NA N A 304 S lections bien e e a e a a e Ga eons area id rl 305 SAL B ck p Seng Sei a Ae mate A a ee 307 Backup file OPHONS 5e N ven e i riis N N E E NA 308 ODpIONS 8 are E E a A A dent e 310 Additional Options anin dent i A ine e E aE E p E censtinertinatys 312 Verity OPTOMS nsan a AE A AA A EEN EEE R E 313 COUI Siinne a a EE sd Uae st eee a beeen eee 314 Execute SQL Server Agent job 315 Name and d sCripllon sise eea r peor renier ira dead ele ne E pea S e ae t 316 SOl CHIONE LR en ent AAR AA Are ee ee Ne Re NME tn et 317 Exe cute T SQL Statement ts snesnensncnennmenenenesensnannntnnee end en tan rsnts ours orne ns Asana aiii 318 Name and d s cniption 2288 ere en A nt inte Naina ra ira ian cr de revenue 319 Generali tiatiitern Seed eee eae trente vel a am nr ee ae 320 election zit ees Aza E ah At ARe a ae eh ea BL eh ee nn re de 322 History Cleanup 323 Name and d s cription 2 nisi AS ANR MA ANNA Be i a ae eS teh Ain NN Waves 324 G n raliste eee rate nn atin aceon ens ar denna eet 325 NGIECTION ENTENDRE RA AA PRE Are A SA ne Bin OA AE Aa ie ee Bt 327 Database Integrity Check uuu cc csetesteesesseesesseeseseevseeseeseeneesnesaesaesseseeseesoeseesaesaesaevaeuaevnvaneaneatesaeseesaesansansoneaes 328 Name and description 1 c
185. et samples 7 gt QE H Schedule with Recurring daily timing plan Edit gp Add New Template Ctrl Insert L Add L Edit Template La sal Delete Template Ctrl Delete p L Delete Move Up Order Move Down Transfer CP Export Template C Export cf Import Template Cf Import CN Clone Template Ei Clone EJ Processes 0 You can manage step templates using the buttons on the Toolbars or popup menu Add New Template Ctri Insert opens the dialog for schedule creation 2 Edit Template opens the schedule editor Delete Template Ctrl Delete removes the template E Export Template Ey Import Template I Clone Template create a copy of the selected template How to create a step based on the template When you are prompted to create a schedule on policy creation or task creation click the A create Schedule from Template button and select the template or several templates at once fromthe list 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 10 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual See also Policy templates Task templates Step templates 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 181 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 4 1 Schedule editor This dialog allows you to create edit schedule s At the Name and Description tab set the name of the schedule and its description C3 Schedule editor Saturday night at 1 o clock x Select a
186. ew seconds Activate EMS SQL Backup License through our website This option allows you to activate product license using license information from your Member Account on our web site Renew maintenance manually Use this option to enter the activation code manually for prolonging your maintenance The activation code can be copied from the Members Area The license activation process does not provide any personally identifiable information of you to EMS lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Activate EMS SQL Backup License online Use this option if you have Internet connection Product license will be activated automatically within a few seconds Note If you already have a license activated on your instance it will be deactivated on entering the new license key Activate EMS SQL Backup License through our website This option allows you to activate product license using license information from your Member Account on our web site Note that this option is disabled when you already have a license activated on your instance Renew maintenance manually Using this option you can prolong maintenance period if you already have a valid activation code Note The Free license can be activated using the online activation only Next step in case of online activation 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 21 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Next step in case of website activation Next ste
187. ew tasks target existing tasks to new servers databases or modify task content Please set policy name and optional description Name Policy 2 Description a In different time zones schedule tasks on basis of Local server time zone Home time zone UTC 05 00 Ekaterinburg RTZ 4 Name Specify policy name in this field Description Define brief info for the created policy In different time zones schedule tasks on basis of These options specify what time zone is used for policy task launch if its servers are located in different time zones If tasks are to start at specific server time for example when server is idle we recommend to select local server time otherwise select local console time Local server time zone Use this option to launch policy tasks according to the local time on each server Home time zone Use this option to launch policy tasks at the time corresponding to the time zone set in the General options It allows easy control over policy status It is recommended to use 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 125 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual this option to synchronize the operations for the Transaction Log Shipping task Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 126 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 2 2 Defining set of tasks At this step you need to define tasks for
188. faelen he Re dat Bat aoe d dt cd dA ennai 329 G n ralistes ee aa eden ee A ieee ieee er eed eee 330 Selection it aise Ae RMS ae A ee EA al eee EP et Aah ee ee ted ise 332 Shrink Database is nn nn dns sty ant duetus sensu TT ET 334 Name and description 335 Gener alin aac as hn oe ian a nan a anne e ar av nt gine 336 CIS CHIOMN LT in nt ann AAI a ea AM ee at 337 Reorganize Ndi ceS eaaa rerea aea aa irar ses seen chereccncteddneraceeencecdeesuesasivandcdugeneseatvacessbaseneezcosucececeeannenayea 339 Name and d s cniption vi n ER tare vet vin nee RE A N A NN AR 340 Generalia a ea a r a e a A E en e E eee eree a aR A A TE E A E E E AA nn res de Rebuild options Update Statistics Name nd d sCriplion s sisi poea EN ESEE a E pre eE 346 ETE e I E AAA A A A Me NN ae 347 SElOCTION eee nt es i ethnie reed aa rae e a ee ree 349 Database Parameters Logger mi iiiiiannrnrrannneeneeenennenesnasnnsnnsnneneeneaneanrannanneanenennnee 351 Name and descriptions cand nain dan nn eee ENEE rE dd en ne rare arme rte fete enorme 852 Generali ns in han aun te eA NE A aes ean a Re A nel fs 353 S lection at sree teh ison ce man nesta nh n nn ri Ab Don ene eee 355 Maintenance Cleanup 357 Nain and GES CriptiOn rss mue nissan nn dead den dira errant ete ner 358 Generali 2 rss tala nna IM ia Ua ee Meee eee ee Ghia a eae one 359 SEIOCTION esnab aeeeet venta ee eee re ee rent hea eval ee a ei ee eee 360 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions
189. folder Specify the destination server folder where backups will be shipped to This folder is set relatively to the destination server Recovery options This group of options allows you to specify the recovery options to be applied to the restore operation No recovery leaves the database in the restoring state This option specifies that the restore operation does not roll back any uncommitted transactions 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual NB When this option is selected the database is not usable in this intermediate non recovered state When used with a file or filegroup restore operation this option forces the database to remain in the restoring state after the restore operation This is useful in either of the following situations e a restore script is being run and the log is always being applied e a sequence of file restores is used and the database is not intended to be usable between two of the restore operations Standby leaves database in read only and standby mode This option allows the database to be brought up for read only access between transaction log restores and can be used with either warm standby server situations or special recovery situations in which it is useful to inspect the database between log restores Recovery rollbacks all uncommitted transactions This option specifies that the restore operation rolls b
190. formation concerning policy launches performed from the specified date to the specified date will be displayed Click the Apply button to set the filter Export mk Export to HTML Use this option to export history data to HTML file By default the report is saved in the program s folder 4 Export to Text Use this option to export history data to TXT file By default the report is saved in the program s folder See also Policy wizard Policy editor Maintenance plan conversion Execute Policy Resolve problem 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 150 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 10 1 Sorting You can perform data sorting in any table of EMS SQL Backup To perform sorting e click the column header to perform ascending or descending sorting of this column values When sorting is applied for a column an arrow icon appears to the right of its title e use the column header popup menu items for this purpose 51 Sort Ascending or at Sort Descending Drag a colum header here to group by that column Time y Status Task Er ises mi inks mm TR Perche cn RER Ai Time Res LA Sort Descending 15 05 2012 11 13 30 Sele 15 05 2012 11 13 31 Sud Group By This Column 15 05 2012 11 11 59 E Group By Box Time Res 1 Column Chooser 15 05 2012 11 11 59 Sud Best Fit 15 05 2012 11 12 03 Suc 15 05 2012 11 11 17 nh T Filter Ed
191. g progress for long running processes Monitoring the log size increase log size limit by date and size Displaying the database size Improved the main form design Other improvements and bugfixes Version 1 1 e Added support of simultaneous backups on the same server Added support of copy only backups which do not affect the normal sequence of backups Software update notifications Improved the process of converting a policy to a template Added new features for managing templates Many interface improvements Now server side components have no memory leaks More stable connections to the server side and Console The log management in the server side is improved The server connection failure caused a configuration record error Fixed now Other improvements and bugfixes Version 1 0 First public release Basic features e Compressing backup files up to 5 times on any server version e Reducing backup time up to 4 times on any server version e Backup encryption on any server version e Easy to use wizard organizing the log shipping process 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 36 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual e Ability to perform 8 types of service tasks including backup log shipping re indexing update statistics etc e Policy engine to quickly deploy maintenance tasks to multiple servers and to monitor their execution results e Centralized monitoring of policies on mul
192. he Schedule templates list 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 18 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 6 Activities At this tab you can view all processes initiated by EMS SQL Backup Policies and A Quick Maintenance Actions The result status of the task execution is displayed in the Status column The same information concerning tasks execution can be retrieved from the Server History viewer To see more detailed log refer to the Task Details section below You can create a detailed bugreport by using the Copy As Bugreport context menu item After the bugreport is generated you can paste it to any text editor The launch of policies created from other instances of the program is also displayed at this tab such policies are displayed as Unregistered in Policy Name column G ES EMS SQL Backup Administration Console koba wv Servers Policies Templates Activities 1 Activities Active Tasks net i ID Policy Name Task Name Server Name Started Finished Status State f 6 Typical large sized databas d DB s doom Line 10 02 2014 Refesh gt EEE EE EE EE Show task history 11 System databases mainten ar DB 10 02 2014 10 02 201 Success M 10 Typical data warehouse mai DB integrity 10 02 2014 10 02 201 Fail E Filter 4 db_logger Service task 1 doom_server tser 10 02 2014 10 02 201 Warning a SF Show only active tasks 3 System da
193. he Steps section allows you to view and edit the set of steps in the execution order 4 3 Task editor Copy of Backup transaction log Sa Select a page Steps in execution order F Name amp description Name BB Schedules acter ig a a Create New Step EZ Ya Create Step from Template B 23 Edit Step TS E P Z Remove Step b Copy Step to Templates LS a V Terminate task on step fail Description Backs up transaction log a a Create new step create a new step You will be prompted to select Step type in the dialog and proceed to the Create step wizard al Create step from template create step from the template The list of step templates will be open in this case 2 Edit step change step settings A Delete step remove the step k Copy step to templates create a template based on the selected step Use 4 and y buttons to reorder Steps Terminate task on step fail If this option is checked then the execution of a whole task is aborted as a result of one of the steps fail You can view each step Description if any in the corresponding field 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 174 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 2 2 3 Schedules The Schedules section allows you to view and edit schedule s for task execution Fa Description 4 3 Task editor Copy of Backup
194. he template to the policy lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 13 3 Specifying backup options At this step you can define backup options for source database s 3 Database Shipping step wizard Database Shipping step 1 Specify backup options Step 3 of 5 Backup folder backup_root_folder server e check Available tags backup root folder server Max Thread Count __ 2 Compression Compression Level 2 iM Encryption Encryption Password Confirm Password Encryption Type rijndael Note backup_root_folder can be configured in the Server side Components Properties dialog Backup folder Specify the directory for backup It is set relatively the source server You can check availability of this folder by clicking the corresponding button Max Thread Count Indicates the number of threads to be used for backup operation Increase the number of threads for faster speed If you are using a multi processor system increasing this value can fasten backup speed You are recommended to set one thread fewer than the number of processors Compression Enable the option to compress backup Compression Level Defines backup file compression level Use 1 for the best speed and 4 for the best compression W Encryption 1999 2015 EMS Database Management
195. hine If backup consists of multiple files this option is only available for EMS SQL Backup type you need to specify the first file from the chain If the backup file includes several databases you are only allowed to select one database at a time Add Cloud File When you select the Add Cloud File option the Select cloud dialog appears Here you need to specify the cloud which contains the necessary backup file ES Select cloud Add doud connection for checking backup files Add existing connection Create new connection ED backupsstio s3 backupsstio Standard Delete 7 You can create a new connection or add an existing one On adding an existing 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 215 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual connection you will be offered to choose among connections specified in Cloud Connections tab of the Options dialog If you create a new connection then after specifying its properties you will be offered to save it so this connection will be available in Cloud Connections To change connection parameters click on its name Depending on connection type the relevant dialog for configuring connection settings will be opened After the cloud is added click the Ok button to start the process of retrieving files from the cloud If the connection to the cloud is established and the user has sufficient privileges for getting the list of files the Se
196. hipping step 1 General Selection Name Use this field to name the step Description This field allows you to define step description 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 372 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 12 2 General This page is used to define options for database shipping step Database Shipping step editor Database Shippi ing step 1 Select a page Backup folder backup_root_folder server Check Name amp description 5 Max Thread Count 4E T Selection a V Compression Compression Level V Encryption Encryption Password Confirm Password Encryption Type rijndael z Network shared folder ka shared shipping i check Destination folder C Backups check Recovery options D No recovery leaves database in the restoring state D Standby leaves database in read only and standby mode Undo file name Recovery 7 Kill connections to destination database ok Cancel Hep Backup folder Specify the directory for backup It is set relatively the source server You can check availability of this folder by clicking the corresponding button Max Thread Count Indicates the number of threads to be used for backup operation Increase the number of threads for faster speed If you are using a multi processor system increasing this valu
197. hronization 525 522 nt net none tete ns CA NSI etes ec ones gen nt es ses dose ge ntns es 144 Launches caa eee cota dent ceueetveccss edeeceuavsesseieevdcogdesveccesveregeunsseecctedsrd cone 145 Resolve probl me ten EEEN AKEN AAEE longe seen eee SN EEEN en neue 147 Viewing Policy History 1 2 ceceaeescccteevecesteevecdsceneeccceedeecee 148 SOrtINg 58 en ne nr A een en en ten een into 150 GROUPING 5 E EE ES EEEE E A E E TETTE 151 LLL L161 EEE A E AAE E A E AE ONAE E A ET 153 Templates Policy template S 2 ss Ea NE weve ccuevevecdunvedscdensdeecddaesveccueveve cduavevecensedeecesess Creating template from policy Task CU EE AARAA ERATAN ATEKA AE aAa Create task Wizard aaa iea danaa a aa ASE aaa a nina rene AAs adaa tested an a ste cedeusseveuesuernce Set service task name and d SCription 2a ses ii isese iiiar isei enei apeos e esae iisen 166 Defin a Setof Steps for service taS Kunrin ieaie ernie AN E RE R AE ES 167 Define schedule for S rvic task nas nan ice een e e i 169 Creating task Task edith rrenean raae reor e a a Aaea aaa tes aea aa EA Aa aea aee ESA naina eaa area ae OERA aaa Ea uaaa Eea Eana Name and description Sie oe EAE E E E ante ee E A E E SCNEQUIES 455 E A E E E A E E E Ney ea ee Nea Creating template from task Step templates eiaa EAE ANAREN NEA NNE ANa aaa T a a Creating template from Step mn niinnanannnnnnenerrnnannesnenneeneeneeneennennenenenennnuee 178 Schedule template 02 nds ner ses en AERE aa 179 Schedu
198. ically on program launch see bak file in the current settings folder Switch Configuration You can load different or backed up program configuration using Switch configuration EMS SQL Backup Console menu item The current options if not saved will be lost Save Configuration You can save existing configuration using Save configuration EMS SQL Backup Console menu item ES Save Configuration x Please specify where the Application configuration will be stored Store in a configuration file on your local computer File Name C Users tio AppData Local EMS SOL Backup Administrati Store in SQL Server database Server Name local Q Authentication Windows Authentication D SQL Server Authentication User Name Password Connection Timeout 15 Database Name msdb v Test Connection Schema dbo Options table emssqlbackup_options 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd so EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Store in a configuration file on your local computer Set the path to the settings file and its name in the File Name field Store in an SQL Server database Server Name Select the host from the drop down list to connect to The list contains servers found automatically in the local network This list is formed using SQL DMO components function ListAvailableSQLServers
199. icies is unknown It usually occurs when launch time has passed but policy was not started or if there is connection to the server to get actual policy status Policies have warnings there have been some warnings on policy execution Warnings include out of range parameters for Database Parameters Logger and some minor warnings on execution that do not affect the final result 006 989 Server status The server which is not connected and has no EMS SQL Backup server side components installed The connected server without EMS SQL Backup server side components installed D The server being refreshed Connection to the server cannot be established Check the SQL Server connection info The server with EMS SQL Backup server side components installed D The server with EMS SQL Backup server side components installed Connection to _ the server is not established The server has some erroneous policies You can fix them using Resolve the Problem _ dialog amp The server has some warnings on policy execution All policies on the server are successful amp b The server has policies with Unknown status ral 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Note Databases have states as well To learn about them see the Database states topic Policies The grid displays all information about the policies deployed on the selected
200. id adverse effects To start conversion select the Maintenance Policies aa Convert from Maintenance plan context menu item for the server at the Servers tab Note If there are no maintenance plans available on the server this context menu item is not displayed Steps Welcome Selecting Maintenance plan to convert to policy Performing conversion Operation execution See also Policy wizard Policy editor Execute policy Resolve problem Viewing Policy History 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 13 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 4 1 Welcome This wizard helps you to convert Maintenance Plans created by Management Studio for SQL Server to policies which EMS SQL Backup can manage You need to have SQL Server Integration Services installed on the server to perform this conversion 4 Maintenance plan conversion Welcome to the Maintenance Plan conversion wizard Step 1 of 4 This wizard helps you convert Maintenance Plans to Policies which SQL Backup can manage Only Maintenance Plans with linear structure can be converted It is recommended to disable Maintenance Plans after conversion to avoid side effects Finish Cancel Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 139 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 4 2 Selecting Maintenance plan to convert to policy At this step you can see the list of Maintenanc
201. ide components All instances available for the selected operation are listed on the right 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd oa EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Click the Connection button to configure Installer connection properties Click the Service account button to configure EMS SQL Backup Service account settings Configured parameters are displayed under the SQL Server instance name 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 6 1 1 Installer connection properties In the Connection for instance_name dialog you need to configure SQL Server login that will be used by Installer and SQL Server port ES Connection for SQL2014 lt Connection settings Windows authentication SQL Server authentication User sa Password bidii Note that the specified account must be of a system administrator role These credentials will be used as SQL Server connection parameters for installer SQL Server port 1532 Check connection Connection settings Specify the type of Microsoft SQL Server authentication to be used for the connection Windows authentication or SQL Server authentication Windows Authentication EMS SQL Backup identifies the current user by his domain name and password which are defined automatically according to his Windows domain user account
202. il resuming Resume All Policies on Server launches all stopped policies of the server A Quick Maintenance Actions opens the list of Maintenance Actions for quick immediate launch F Show History opens the Viewing Policy History window B view Server side components properties Install Update Remove server side EMS SQL Backup components runs the corresponding wizard 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd e EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Activate license on server Deactivate license on server __ Send bug report to EMS amp Add the selected object to shortcuts t Collapse all groups g Expand all groups See also Group popup menu Groups popup menu Database popup menu 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 65 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 14 Database popup menu This popup menu is available for the database at DB Explorer Backup Database Restore Database Refresh F5 gt Maintenance Policies gt 8 Backup Database Show History Restore Database amp Addto Shortcuts Shift insert 4 Database Shipping ey Execute SQL Server Agent Job 4 Execute T SQL Statement 23 History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices 2 Shrink Database 1 Update Statistics h Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup g Backup the selected database Restore the selected database 2 Refresh d
203. iled information about the performed step or errors or warnings depending on the status You can generate launches and policy reports using the Z Report button See also Getting Started Policies Templates 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Activities Maintenance Actions Options 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd so EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 1 Popup menus Popup menu of the object contains the list of actions that can be applied to the object The following popup menus are available in the DB Explorer at Servers tab Group popup menu Groups popup menu Server popup menu Database popup menu 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd st EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 1 1 Groups popup menu The popup menu is available for the top Groups node at DB Explorer _ Create New Group Insert 2 Refresh F5 Maintenance Policies b 5A Quick Maintenance Actions amp Backup Database Show History Restore Database Collapse re Database Shipping ey Execute SQL Server Agent Job Execute T SQL Statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices IO Shrink Database 1 Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Ys Maintenance Cleanup L Create New Group or Ins key 2 Refresh servers and policies
204. info for the created step Step 1 of 4 Set step name and description The Database Parameters Logger step allows you to keep track of major server parameters last backup date last integrity check transaction log and data file free space etc Name Database Parameters Logger step 1 Description This step does not appear for Quick Maintenance Actions Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 271 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 10 2 Selecting database Use this step of the wizard to select databases to update statistics L Database Parameters Logger step wizard Database Parameters Logger step 1 Define database selection for servers M Servers FER lt a FE ka EA aschel sa2008 E These databases DE ka salexpress ME master dean_winxp sql2008r2 a 6 model HE 192 168 65 53 TE msdb we ZG Adventureworks ME deimos sql2012 VIG Demods MO olivia hr IB aschel sgl2014 cAI g 6 orphaned JE TEST 16 ves 8 xtraLargeDB lt Back Next gt Finish Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode Databases and objects All Use this option
205. ing template Selecting objects Setting options Performing operation See also Backup Database Restore Database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Shrink Database Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 263 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 9 1 Naming step You can name the step using the Name field The Description field can be used to define brief info for the created step Update Statistics step wizard Update step 1 Set step name and description Step 1 of 4 The Update Statistics step ensures the query optimizer has up to date information about the distribution of data values in the tables This allows the optimizer to make better judgements about data access strategies Name Update Statistics step 1 Description cs Back Next gt Finish Cancel This step does not appear for Quick Maintenance Actions Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 24 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 9 2 Selecting objects Use this step of the wizard to select objects to update statistics 24 Update Statistics
206. ing the elements of backup This step allows you to select history that will be used to restore the database This step is not available if Files has been selected as backup source at the previous step The order is generating automatically Backup set parts necessary for successful database restore process should be selected carefully Please check that all backups required for full restore are selected To work with encrypted backups enter the password by pressing the Set password button or double clicking the required backup CRE Specify all necessary backup set elements that may be required for restore process Step 2 of 5 Some files are missing on the local drive Use the Find in doud option to search for them on the doud or uncheck these files in the list 02 06 2015 11 03 13 local sql2014cs new_db D Set password Date Type Encrypted Backup file First LSN Last LSN W 28 05 2015 16 29 52 Full False tiobackups SQL2014CS_ne 38000000037700037 3800000003340000 1 v 02 06 2015 11 00 27 Differential False tiobackups SQL2014CS_ne 39000000037400001 3900000003770000 1 W 02 06 2015 11 01 32 TransactionLog False 3500000000800000 1 3900000003770000 1 v 02 06 2015 11 02 31 TransactionLog False entente S 39000000038000001 39000000038300001 v 02 06 2015 11 03 04 TransactionLog False C Backups SQL2014CS SQL 3900000003830000 1 390000000 3860000 1 v 02 06 2015 11 03 13 TransactionLog Fa
207. ions Ltd as EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 17 Create a report on policy execution Using the reports tool you can view information on policy tasks execution that is displayed in the Launches section as well as save reports to files of different formats and send them via email To generate a report on task execution you need to click the Report button on the toolbar of the Launches section or select the Show Report context menu item of a task There are three types of reports e Single server report e Multi server report e Detailed task report Single server report This report can be viewed when a single server is selected in the explorer and a policy deployed on this server is selected in the Policies area If a policy deployed on several servers is selected in Policies area a report will include information on launches of this policy only on the selected server The report displays brief information on tasks of the selected policy including task name planned start time started time finished and task status Multi server report Multi server report is available when a policy deployed on multiple servers is selected in the Policies area Besides a group or a solution must be selected in the Servers area The report displays brief information on tasks of the selected policy including task name server name planned start time started time finished and task status Detailed task report Task re
208. ions as Execute SQL Server Agent Job wizard The following pages are available in this dialog Name_and description General See also Backup database Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Shrink Database Reorganize Indices Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 36 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 2 1 Name and description This page allows you to view edit the step name and description Execute SQL Server Agent job step 1 Task name Use this field to name the step Description This field allows you to define step description 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 317 7 2 2 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Selection Use this page to edit job name p og Execute SOL Server Agent job step editor Execute SQL Server Agent job step 1 Select a page M Servers Selected SQL Server Agent jobs in execution order een a a Em J D Sesion cr shrink AdventureWorks aschel sg2008 x Available SQL Server Agent jobs Le fad AdventureWorks_check cr ayz_ft fig ava_stats_SQLAdministratorRepository cr AdventureWorks_maintenance fi deanup_stats_SQLAdministratorRepository ig Stats_upd cr deanup_alarm_log_SQL
209. iteria Performing operation See also Backup Database Restore Database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Shrink Database Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 11 1 Naming step You can name the step using the Name field The Description field can be used to define brief info for the created step ET a Set step name and description Step 1 of 4 The Maintenance Cleanup step allows you to remove a backup or report file or a group of files in a folder that remain in the system after Maintenance plan execution The Step indudes an option to remove old files by task schedule or remove files that have reached a specified age days weeks months or years Maintenance Cleanup step 1 This step does not appear for Quick Maintenance Actions Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 278 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 11 2 Selecting files folders for cleanup At this step you need to define server s and locations for cleanup L Maintenance Cleanup step wizard Maintenance Cleanup step 1 Specify objects their settings and location Step 2 of 4 M Servers Location Descri
210. itor Fi ter Time Res 15 05 2012 11 11 17 Sud Best Fit all columns To cancel sorting use the Clear Sorting item of the column header popup menu 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 151 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 10 2 Grouping When grouping by a column is applied all records are displayed as subnodes to the grouping row value as displayed on the screenshot below If necessary you can group data by two or more columns In this case column headers are displayed hierarchically To apply grouping e enable the Group By Box area in the column header popup menu e drag the column header to the gray area at the top or use the Group by this column popup menu item of the column header Server Task Full Expand p Les E Full Collapse Server MERLIN SQL2008 Task Service task on ME X Clear Grouping 15 05 2012 13 37 03 Succeeded Time Result Step 15 05 2012 13 37 03 Success Reorganize Ir 15 05 2012 13 37 04 Success Update Statis 15 05 2012 13 36 41 Succeeded 15 05 2012 13 35 02 Succeeded Server ASCHEL SQL2008 Task Service task on ASCHEL To reverse grouping e drag the column header back e use the Ungroup item of the grouped column to clear a specific grouping e use the Clear grouping item of the Group by area popup menu to remove all grouping If necessary you can group data by two or more
211. ity check on regular basis you need to include this task into Policy 1 At Step 2 of the Create Policy wizard click Create new step button and select Database Integrity Check step type 2 Also you can create a new Step Template for further use selecting Database Integrity Check step at the Templates tab Steps of the Database Integrity Check wizard Naming template Selecting databases Setting options Performing operation See also Backup Database Restore Database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Reorganize Indices Shrink Database Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 6 1 Naming step You can name the step using the Name field The Description field can be used to define brief info for the created step Database Integrity Check step wizard Database Integrity Check step 1 ee Set step name and description Step 1 of 4 The Check Database Integrity step performs internal consistency checks of the data and index pages within the database Name Database Integrity Check step 1 Description lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel This step does not appear for Quick Maintenance Actions Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 23 EMS SQL
212. kup options This step is available only on creating back up by means of SQL Server W Backup Database step wizard Backup Database step 1 Sa Set other backup options Step 4 of 9 Block Size Default To restore from CD 2KB Other KB Backup password Password Confirm password Note Option is not supported on SQL Server 2012 or higher Write type Append Overwrite Backup compression Block size Define the size of a data block in bytes The supported sizes are 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 and 65536 64 KB bytes Possible values are Default To restore from CD 2 KB Other i e you can specify an arbitrary value If necessary you can set a Password for the backup enter the password twice in the respective edit fields Write type Append Overwrite Select whether the media should be appended or overwritten during the backup operation By appending another backup set to existing media the previous contents of the media remain intact and the new backup is written after the end of the last backup on the media Backup compression 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual This option enables backup compression overriding the server level default for SQL Server 2008 Enterprise and later versions lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Managem
213. l 8 2 3 3 Amazon S3 Cloud Connection The Amazon S3 Connection Settings dialog is provided for configuring connection to Amazon bucket for uploading backup files Ee Amazon 3 Connection Settings s Name 53testingpurpose Bucket s3testingpurpose Path backups Access key AKIAISYFDZ4R50JV2CDA Secret key Storage dass Standard Le Protocol HTTP Jl Use proxy 7 Server proxy Port 8080 User name p i Password Timeout 60 sec IR cancel Help Name Specify the name for the connection The connection name must be unique among all that were already created Bucket Define the bucket that will be used for storing backups You can create a bucket on the Amazon website If the specified bucket does not exist it will be created automatically in US Standard region Note that the bucket name must be unique among all Amazon S3 buckets Path If you want backup files to be stored in a folder then set the path to the folder within the specified bucket The folder will be created automatically on file upload Use the as a directory separator For example backups Adventure Works 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd sa EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual The Access key and the Secret key are used to get access to your bucket and are found on the Security Credentials page of your
214. lder xs di Time Is greater than 01 05 2012 Time Is less than 31 05 2012 Condition consists of Column Logical operator and Value Press any of this elements to change its value Two or more conditions form Condition group Its popup menu allows you to change relations between child conditions And Or Not And w Not Or to Add Condition or Condition Group or to X Remove Group For root condition group the Z Clear All operation is also available Note You can use the Insert keyboard button to add a condition to the selected group and the Delete button to clear filter When any filter is applied the grey panel appears in the bottom of the grid 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 155 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Drag a column header here to group by that column Time Manual Status Task Server Message 08 02 2014 23 30 00 Success Shrink DB ka 08 02 2014 23 10 00 ka F 08 02 2014 23 00 00 ka 08 02 2014 22 30 00 Success ShrinkDB ka 08 02 2014 22 10 00 Success BackupDB ka 08 02 2014 22 00 01 Success DB integrity ka F 08 02 2014 21 30 00 Success ShrinkDB ka 08 02 2014 21 10 00 Success BackupDB ka 08 02 2014 21 00 00 Success DB integrity ka F 08 02 2014 20 30 00 Success ShrinkDB ka 08 02 2014 20 10 00 Success BackupDB ka 08 02 2014 20 00 00 Success DB integri
215. le editor een ee nee mg een scene ets nt a nage ent een een 181 Creating schedule from template nn ninrrarrenesnesnesnenneanennnannasneaneeneenenneennenneneanenennnuee 183 Activities 186 Maintenance Actions 190 Creating Steps oseon aaiae ecenweadwecestins en ere onu eme nues ee ren nos end eee ne mens none en lens ner este s eee 191 Backup Database ccccssssessesesseeeseeseseessessessevsessevseeseeseeseesoesoesaesaesaesaeesessoesoesaesaesaesaeuaevaneaneaneanenausausausaesaneaeeaes 193 Namna SS D LE A EN entendre sem died sans ne teste aa iaaa 194 Sel cting databas provide lise sivas ana a ne noi sedan AAs ANAVEN AANE ist e ani terne due vig EENI 195 S lecting databaSe s 54 nets fine sos foeechucbusrh ta cracks etsses tices dea senna A Dre N en ea ee mener Ste etes de 196 Defining SQL Backup settings 199 Setting DACKUP OPTIONS ien 5 cy ecscas costs nr en nn entre defense ttteaSdestsbaess eaidadvingitaueciduaceat sneescaattncndaaad 201 SOL SEN El A ita ie ee ee ok Ge a ee a ey 203 Setting backup options for incremental backup 203 Setting Ne Option Sar dl nn En aden A ete dust De ane eme vee te A AE AES 204 Specifying backup verifying options seen 206 Specifying cloud CONNeCTIONS 1 255rr rene in deniers den eV eee tee des AE aaa ov et eee 208 Performing Op ration carte teen akara esiaine donnent ne shiva ceaasishit ead sante Era dE ae Pate do Restore Database 5552505 nn nn nn et ete Un Selecting available backup Sel
216. lect a page Block Size F Name amp description Default A General To restore from CD 2KB T Selection a Other 4518 Backup file options IF Backup password Additional options Password Al Verify options 2D Clouds Confirm password Note Option is not supported on SQL Server 2012 or higher Write type Append 5 Overwrite F Backup compression Block size Define the size of a data block Possible values are Default To restore from CD 2 KB Other i e you can specify an arbitrary value The supported sizes are 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 and 65536 64 KB bytes Possible values are Default To restore from CD 2 KB Other i e you can specify an arbitrary value Options W Verify backup when finished Check this option to enable backup verification x Perform checksum before writing to media This option enables disables checksum verification before writing to the backup media W Continue on error This option determines whether the backup operation will be stopped or forced to continue if an error occurs Write type Append Overwrite Select whether the media should be appended or overwritten during the backup operation 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 311 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual By appending another backup set to existing media the previous contents of the media r
217. lect file dialog appears It contains the list of files located on the cloud ES Select file if MSSQLSERVER_new_Full_2015 05 15_12 46 41 bkp r RH SQL2008_new_db_Full_2015 04 29_16 30 13 bak RH SQL2008_new_db_Full_2015 04 29_16 50 39 bak RH SQL2014CS_mydb_Full_sa bkp RH SQL2014CS_mydb_new_db_Full_2015 04 24_12 42 28 bkp RH SQL2014CS_mydb_new_db_Full_2015 04 24_12 43 30 bkp RH SQL2014CS_mydb_new_db_Full_2015 04 24_12 46 42 bkp RH SQL2014CS_mydb_new_db_Full_2015 04 24_12 48 40 bkp RH SQL2014CS_mydb_new_db_Full_2015 04 24_12 48 53 bkp RH SQL2014CS_mydb_new_db_Full_2015 04 24_12 49 12 bkp Local path for download _ C Backups Select the necessary backup file and specify the Local path for download the path on your local drive where the backup files will be saved after download Note The file for restoring will be added after it is downloaded from the cloud Clear Removes the selected file from the list Clear All Removes all files from the list Use a and x buttons to reorder selected files Set Password If the chosen backup is encrypted then click the button to input the password for the backup in the opened dialog 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 26 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 217 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 2 2 Specify
218. lect the Maintenance Policies 2 Create New Policy solution context menu item to create a new policy All databases servers will be checked automatically in creating steps in this policy 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 4 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 11 Transfer policy tasks to another set of databases servers There are several ways to transfer policy tasks from one set of databases servers to another The way chosen depends on whether the policy was created on a solution or not and on tasks and steps count in a policy A policy was created on a solution with databases servers 1 If a policy includes a big number of tasks steps then do the following e create a template based on this policy without saving selected databases by choosing the 4 Create Template from Policy its context menu item e create a new solution and add needed databases servers to it e create policy on this solution based on the created template by choosing the l Maintenance Policies Create from Templates of the solution context menu item 2 If a policy includes several tasks steps then it is recommended to open every step editor and check needed databases servers on a Selection tab A policy was created on separate databases servers 1 If a policy includes a big number of tasks steps then it is recommended to do the following e unite databases servers on which you want to transfer policy into
219. llows you to view edit the step name and description Execute T SQL Statement step 1 Task name Use this field to name the step Description This field allows you to define step description 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 320 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 3 2 General At this page you can view edit T SQL statement a ig Execute T SQL Statement step editor Execute T SQL Statement step 1 x Select a page T SQL statement Name amp description delete from dbo projects_cache M il go EN Fie irom dbo actives cache go Tg Selection Execute timeout T SQL statement This area contains T SQL statement text to be performed Execute timeout This field indicates time limit for syntax check Use Load Save buttons to work with text loading and saving Use the Check statement button to run the statement on the server in PARSEONLY mode to ensure that T SQL statement is correct The detailed log of errors is displayed at the Errors tab All errors are displayed on the Errors tab 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 321 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Query text Errors Server Message Line ASCHEL SQL2008 Incorrect syntax near 8 Execute timeout 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 322 EMS SQL Backup Administr
220. lse C Backups SQL2014CS SQL 3900000003860000 1 39000000038900001 m r The first column indicates whether the file from the set is available for restoring or not backup file is found on the local drive backup file is found in the cloud storage backup file is not found In the Backup file column you can see where the file is located the local path orthe cloud storage If the file is not stored locally or was not found automatically in the cloud you can select this file in the list and click the Find in cloud button 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 28 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual In the opened Select cloud dialog you need to add clouds where the backup file will be searched By default this dialog lists the clouds where the backup file can be probably situated clouds that were specified during the backup and in the similar cloud storages from the Cloud Connections list ES Select cloud ase List doud connections for checking backup file C Add existing connection Create new connection aschel shared backupss es cifs aschel shared backupss User emsdomain tio ED backupsstio ie s3 backupsstio Standard You can create a new connection or add an existing one On adding an existing connection you will be offered to choose among connections specified in Cloud Connections tab of the Options dialog If you create a
221. lutions Ltd 33 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual If the license key was successfully reactivated you will see a message informing you about time it was reactivated Otherwise you will see an error message describing the occurred problem You can launch License activation wizard or License deactivation wizard for the particular server directly from the License Manager dialog by clicking the Activate Deactivate button correspondingly 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 6 Version history Product name Version Release date EMS SQL Backup Version 1 7 February 27 2015 EMS SQL Backup Version 1 6 November 28 2014 EMS SQL Backup Version 1 5 July 7 2014 EMS SQL Backup Version 1 4 February 25 2014 SQL Angel 1 3 Version 1 3 November 12 2013 SQL Angel 1 2 Version 1 2 June 10 2013 SQL Angel 1 1 Version 1 1 April 1 2013 SQL Angel 1 0 Version 1 0 December 12 2012 Version 1 7 Free version of SQL Backup is available now The number of maintainable databases per SQL Server instance is restricted to two databases 2 Added the possibility to copy backup files from SQL Server to the machine where SQL Backup Administration Console is running Get Backup To Console wizard 3 Added the possibility to upload backups to Microsoft Azure storage 4 The ability to overwrite existing backup files in network folders SMB CIFS is implemented
222. m SQL Server connection info Email settings Log storage settings Backup settings See also Register Server Wizard Install server side EMS SQL Backup Components Update Remove server side EMS SQL Backup components Server properties 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 9 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 8 1 SQL Server connection info At the SQL Server connection info tab you can view change authentication to be used for user authorization on the server The settings you provide will be used by the service installed on the server Unlike the Server Properties dialog this one is used to set SQL Server authentication parameters for an account that will be used for connection by a service installed on a server ea Server side Components Properties Select a page SQL Server connection settings for server side components Ra SQL Server connection info_ Windows Authentication SQL Server Authentication is Email settings Login tester Log storage settings n a Backup settings Password m Connection Timeout 30 4 SQL Server Agent Stopped V Show Debug Info Specify the type of Microsoft SQL Server authentication to be used for the connection Windows authentication or SQL Server authentication SQL Server authentication requires authorization information Login and Password Connection Timeout Use this option to restric
223. ment is accomplished by Login Manager If Server authentication is selected as the authentication type you should provide authorization settings User and Password Analyzing them a system determines information and therefore object access permissions 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd e EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 6 Stand alone local server side components installer Stand alone local server side components installer is a tool for local installation of server side components on every SQL Server instance This installer is distributed with EMS SQL Backup for local installation on the server If you cannot install modify or delete EMS SQL Backup components from the EMS SQL Backup Administration Console using the Install server side EMS SQL Backup components or Update Remove server side EMS SQL Backup components wizards due to some reasons you can launch the installer directly on the server machine In order to do this copy the EMS SQL Backup setup file to the server machine and then launch it On the third step of this wizard choose the Server side only mode After the EMS SQL Backup Setup wizard is finished the Installation Wizard for installing server side components is launched This wizard allows you to install modify or delete components of the EMS SQL Backup service Steps Configuring installation settings Installer connection properties Service account properties Perf
224. n recovered state When used with a file or filegroup restore operation this option forces the database to remain in the restoring state after the restore operation This is useful in either of the following situations e a restore script is being run and the log is always being applied e a sequence of file restores is used and the database is not intended to be usable between two of the restore operations Standby leaves database in read only and standby mode This option allows the database to be brought up for read only access between transaction log restores and can be used with either warm standby server situations or special recovery situations in which it is useful to inspect the database between log restores Undo file name Specify the undo file name so that the recovery effects can be undone The same undo file can be used for consecutive restores of the same database NB If free disk space is exhausted on the drive containing the specified undo file name the restore operation stops 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 374 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Recovery rollbacks all uncommitted transactions This option specifies that the restore operation rolls back any uncommitted transactions After the recovery process the database is ready for use Set V Kill connections to destination database option ON to forced disconnection of all processes 1999 2015 EMS Database
225. n At EEEa 100 Log storage Settings mnt ir nn rite AE Aa SAE a era ced este ete cust mea co nes are menu mens dense 102 Backup Settings cscccssssssessessseeeeeseeseessessessessessevsevseesneseeseeseesaesaesaesaeeseesoesnesaesaesaevaeuaesonsseesneaeusaesnesaesansansaeeaes 104 Get backup to Console nennu nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nenna nnmnnn nnna 105 Specifying backKUP SOUFCE mnrnnrrenesnennennennenennanenanaananneenennennennennnnnneanesnesnesneeneennennearannanrannananee 106 Selecting backup files nn rrrrsnesrsernernnanennnnnnanreenesnesne amener anasna is nek eneencenrearanraaraanananee 108 Viewing Summary Inform ATION iiirinrnnrrannrnnennennennennennennennnnnsnnsnesnesnesnnennennearanraarennennnnee 109 FRO POMS ironii TE on idee Mn scene tenace sun sent Dunes tua ses DOS RE ce Donc Re L D SSL ae cu nas Dane rene EARS 110 Part IV Policies 114 POPUP MGMUS aca aaRS Eaa AEREA ANER Policy POPUP MENU ee Task POPUP MENU sieren iaei rraioa ninne e nasede Ria naiaiae eaa oia ne a adea eap a anaana eaan eae ea a aa erre Eakas arraie Step context MENU ou ee eeseseeseesesseeeeeeeeeseeseeseessessesseuseeseeseeseesaesaesaesaevsesaeesesneesesnaesaesaesaesseuseuseesausaesaesaesanvanvaneans Schedule context menu Server context menu Policy Wizard scons hintinne reaa teens tn edit once en eng ot en es ee nt taste enr Sense tag on ee Setting policy name and description iiiirrnnnnnnnrnnanannenenenenrenenenenenennse 124 Defining Se
226. n console User manual 7 2 10 2 General At this page you can edit general options of Maintenance Cleanup step Maintenance Cleanup step editor Maintenance Cleanup step 1 sd and Ct ca Name amp description All files older than 7 Days v CO All files except for the latest 7 SQL Server criteria T Apply file age criteria on maintenance deanup Delete files older than 1 Month s x Cane Hp SQL Backup and Clouds criteria Set the conditions for EMS SQL Backup backup files and files on clouds to be deleted Use All files older than for time limiting or All files except for the latest criteria to specify the number of the latest backups to keep SQL Server criteria Apply file age criteria on maintenance cleanup Use this option to delete files above the age specified below 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 360 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 10 3 Selection This page allows you to edit server and folder files selection for maintenance cleanup d Ys Maintenance Cleanup step editor Maintenance Cleanup step 1 Select a page E Servers Provider Path File type Extension Recursive a OP EPES 19 CEE ns General SE aschel sal2008 E MS SQL Server C Backups Backups bak B LE E eee E dean_winxp sql2008r2 TE 192 168 66 53 me doom_server tserv2005 al deimos sql2012
227. n for servers Pr M Servers PRE TT FE ka HA aschel sql2008 E These databases DE ka salexpress ME master dean_winxp sql2008r2 a 8 model NU 192 168 66 53 TE msdb me Hs TE deimos sql2012 V DemoDB MO olivia a B hr JE aschel sql2014 VE Largeds g orphaned 8 16 ves 8 xtraLargeDB m ame Co Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode Databases All Use this option to select both system and user databases All system This option indicates that only system databases should be shrinked All user Select this option to shrink user databases only 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 250 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual By mask This option allows defining database selection by mask Use for a set of any characters and for any single character in the database name By list This option allows you to select databases manually If you are creating a step in a policy template then you are able to enter databases manually Databases By List These databases A TestDB 8 AdventureWorks AdventureWorks 1 Enter Cancel Use the button or Ins key to define database name After you click the Enter button the database will be added to the list Any database
228. n then after specifying its properties you will be offered to save it so this connection will be available in Cloud Connections To change connection parameters click on its name Depending on connection type the relevant dialog for configuring connection settings will be opened All files by mask In this field you can specify the mask for the file names to be deleted lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 11 3 Defining cleanup criteria This step allows you to define cleanup criteria Li Maintenance Cleanup step wizard Maintenance Cleanup step 1 Define criteria for deanup Step 3 of 4 SQL Backup and Clouds criteria All files older than 71 Pays T All files except for the latest 7 SQL Server criteria V Apply file age criteria on maintenance deanup Delete files older than 1 Month s X Finish Cancel SQL Backup and Clouds criteria Set the conditions for EMS SQL Backup backup files and files on clouds to be deleted Use All files older than for time limiting or All files except for the latest criteria to specify the number of the latest backups to keep SQL Server criteria W Apply file age criteria on maintenance cleanup Use this option to delete files above the age specified below lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database
229. n will be stopped or forced to continue despite encountering errors such as invalid checksums or torn pages 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 207 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 1 9 Specifying cloud connections Use this step to set cloud connections for storing backups You can add unlimited number of remote and local storage engines Copies of backup files will be uploaded to all of the specified storages The connections to the following storages are supported e SMB CIFS e FTP e Amazon S3 Cloud e Secure FTP e Microsoft Azure F Backup Database step wizard Quick Backup Database step X Specify doud connections for storing backups Step 6 of 7 Cm Add existing connection Create new connection ED backupsstio Delete 3 backupsstio Standard Naschel shared backupss Delete cifs aschel shared backupss User emsdomain tio WD Note Backup copies will not be deleted from the local disk if the upload to at least one doud is failed CY Help lt Back Next gt Run hcan You can create a new connection or add an existing one On adding an existing connection you will be offered to choose among connections specified in Cloud Connections tab of the Options dialog If you create a ne
230. nation database may be in either the recovering or standby state which leaves the database available for limited read only access No recovery leaves the database in the restoring state This option specifies that the restore operation does not roll back any uncommitted 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 20 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual transactions NB When this option is selected the database is not usable in this intermediate non recovered state When used with a file or filegroup restore operation this option forces the database to remain in the restoring state after the restore operation This is useful in either of the following situations e a restore script is being run and the log is always being applied e a sequence of file restores is used and the database is not intended to be usable between two of the restore operations Standby leaves database in read only and standby mode This option allows the database to be brought up for read only access between transaction log restores and can be used with either warm standby server situations or special recovery situations in which it is useful to inspect the database between log restores Undo file name Specify the undo file name so that the recovery effects can be undone The same undo file can be used for consecutive restores of the same database NB If free disk space is exhausted on the drive containing the specified
231. nce action by selecting Quick Maintenance Actions Database Parameters Logger context menu item of a server or a database In case a status of a policy including Database Parameters Logger step changed to Warning after policy execution that means some databases parameters values do not match conditions set on the third step of Database Parameters Logger wizard To view these parameters and their values select this step in the Launches list and click the Show details button The information in the dialog appeared will contain a detailed report on step execution result 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 407 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 9 Add database server to an existing policy There are several ways to add databases or servers to a policy The way chosen depends on whether the policy was created on a solution or not and on tasks and steps count in a policy A policy was created on a solution with databases servers 1 If a policy includes a big number of tasks steps then do the following e create a template based on this policy without saving selected databases by choosing the 4 Create Template from Policy its context menu item e add needed databases servers to the existing solution e create policy on a renewed solution based on the created template by choosing the gt Maintenance Policies 2 Create from Templates of the solution context menu item 2 If a policy includes
232. nent of server maintenance Backup Database Restore Database Execute SQL Server Agent job Executing T SOL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Shrink Database Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping To perform immediate Step execution use 2 Quick Maintenance Actions lt Step name gt popup menu item in the Servers tab E Backup Database Provides an important safeguard to protect critical data stored in SQL Server databases Execute SQL Server Agent job SQL Server Agent jobs are typically used to automate maintenance tasks You can execute any of them Execute T SQL statement Runs Transact SQL statements of your choice History Cleanup Deletes historical data related to backup restore activities SQL Server Agent jobs and SQL Backup tasks Database Integrity Check Checks the allocation and structural integrity of database objects and indices Reorganize Indices Reorganizes or rebuilds fragmented indices in database tables views and moves index pages into a more efficient search order Shrink Database Reduces the size of SQL Server database data and log files by removing unused pages Update Statistics Updates information about distribution of key values in the database table or indexed view to improve query performance Database Parameters Logger Collects information of major SQL Server object parameters
233. new connection then after specifying its properties you will be offered to save it so this connection will be available in Cloud Connections To change connection parameters click on its name Depending on connection type the relevant dialog for configuring connection settings will be opened After you have specified clouds click the Ok button to start searching The search is performed in the clouds one after another when the file is found on one of the clouds you are offered to use this cloud and stop searching You can continue searching as well After all backup files are found click the Next button to proceed to the Defining target database parameters step of the wizard Note If you have files found in clouds you will be offered to download them before proceeding to the next step It is necessary action for the database restoring Files are downloaded to the folder that was specified in the backup settings lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 29 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 2 3 Defining target database parameters Use this step of the wizard to define the target database parameters Restore as Select Existing database to restore to an existing database or New database if you want to create a new database Database name Select the database to perform restoring on from the list of all available databases on the specified host
234. nfigured in the Server side components Properties dialog You can check availability of the defined folder by clicking the corresponding button Note The Check button is available only if backup is configured on a single server Backup file name Define backup file name Type backup file name manually or form it using variables For your convenience server database backup_type date and login tags are provided Note To insert a tag in the field simply click it in the list of Available tags Backup to a single file Select this option to backup all selected databases to a single file Backup to several files This option indicates that backup should be split to several files Splitting the backup can in some cases speed up the backup process Split by size Indicates that backup file will be split to volumes of the specified size 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd so EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Split by database Indicates that each database will be backed up into a separate file Note Backup to several files option is disabled for SQL Server backup provider 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd so EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 1 6 Options At this page you can define backup options This tab is only available for SQL Server provider selected Backup Database step editor Backup Database step 1 a Se
235. nistration and development SQL Studio unites the must have tools in one powerful and easy to use environment that will make you more productive than ever before ES EMS SOL Backup for SOL Server Perform backup and restore log shipping and many other regular maintenance tasks on the whole set of SQL Servers in your company ce SQL Administrator for SQL Server T4 Perform administrative tasks in the fastest easiest and most efficient way Manage maintenance tasks monitor their performance schedule frequency and the last execution result SOL Manager for SQL Server Simplify and automate your database development process design explore and maintain existing databases build compound SQL query statements manage database user rights and manipulate data in different ways Data Export for SQL Server Export your data to any of 20 most popular data formats including MS Access MS Excel MS Word PDF HTML and more Data Import for SQL Server Import your data from MS Access MS Excel and other popular formats to database tables via user friendly wizard interface Data Pump for SQL Server Migrate from most popular databases MySQL PostgreSQL Oracle DB2 InterBase Firebird etc to Microsoft SQL Server Data Generator for SQL Server Generate test data for database testing purposes in a simple and direct way Wide range of data generation parameters G 41 aa DB Comparer for SQL Server Compare and synchronize the struc
236. nnnnnnnnaanesneeneeneeneeneennenneaneannnuse 76 Update Remove server side SQL Backup components 77 Selecting Updating reM OVING type mmmniinannnnannennnnnrnnnenesneeneeneeneeneeneenrennennente 78 Selecting operation type nnnnannnnnnnenennnenerenesnesnesneeneeneeneeneeneanreaneannte 80 Specifying service account settings ananmnnannnnnnnnrnenenenneeneeneeneeneenrennennennnte 81 Performing Operation ni ininnnnnnnnenrnnnnennennenneneeennannnnneanesneeneeneeneeneennenneaneannnese 83 Update server side components ss nssssssnrrreennneeneennnneneennsneeeennnneneens 84 Service account settings Stand alone local server side components installer cccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeeeneensnees 89 Configuring Installati n Settings ssn eaaa radiaan aa Aa a o a ee naaa Eaa aeaaaee 90 Installer connection PrOPSrtleS n nnii mna AE a E EAA AT E A A E 92 Performing Operation iiniinnnnnnnnenrnnnnennennesneneennnnnnnneanesneeneeneeneeneennenneaneannnese 93 Server prOoperties 211 7045s2rs0s2rhrrcdceersesen lasser erssns ANENE dons EAEEREN Len c dns ess dass ire n dass ae Se nent ees 94 Server connection INFO menannnnnnnnnnenrnnnneneenenennensnesnesnesnesnesnneneene ane eneanreananente 95 Server options Server side components properties smmnnenennnnennnnnnnennnennneenennnneenennnne 98 SQL Server CONNECTION INFO inirrnnnnnannrnrnrnnenenennennensnnnnesnesnesnesneeneeneeneenranranreannte 99 Email Settings rene ee aa nn tent t
237. ntage of free space that will be left in database file after it is shrunk You need to decide whether freed space should be retained in database files or returned to operating system W Suppress informational messages Enable the option to disable informational messages 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 337 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 6 3 Selection This page allows you to edit database selection to shrink I Shrink Database editor Shrink system DB x m Databases By List x Name amp description VIE ka A General TE ka salexpress mn Ihren de Ha seecion V9 TIG master aschel sql2008 VG model Es FE AdventureWorks ME DemoDB FG h ME LargeDB B orphaned FE TEST OG ves B xtraLargeDB Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode It is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy Databases All Use this option to select both system and user databases All system This option indicates that only system databases should be shrinked All user Select this option to shrink user databases only By mask This option allows defining database selection by m
238. ntureWorks_20100419 G DemoDB LargeDB f new_db Click the Clean Mismatches button to delete the missed database s table s view s from the list for the policy cannot be executed for them 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd su EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 7 4 Rebuild options This tab provides a number of advanced options for index reorganizing 5 FE Reorganize Indices step editor Reorganize DB indices xn Select a page Advanced indices rebuilding options E Name amp description General T Selection nr Change free space per page percentage to 0 1 Pad index Sort results in tempdb E Ignore duplicate keys Keep index online while reindexing Free space Define which pages should be reorganized ones with the default or specified amount of free space per page W Pad index Enable this option to leave the space open on each page in the intermediate levels of index W Sort results in tempdb This option indicates that intermediate sort results used to rebuild indices will be stored in the tempdb database W Ignore duplicate keys If the option is enabled then duplicate keys will be ignored W Keep index online while reindexing This option determines whether concurrent user access to the underlying table or clustered index data and any associated non clustered index
239. o This folder is set relatively to the local machine Backup provider You need to select the provider that had been used for creating the backup Backup source History shows the list of the available database backups for the specified server and database Only backups of corresponding provider types are displayed Files allows selecting individual backup files from the server Server Select the server to get database backup from Database This option is available for History backup source and contains databases available on the selected server Choose the database you need to get the backup of and the list of the backups available for the selected database will be displayed below You need to select the backup and proceed to the next step of the wizard 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 107 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual For the Files backup source Backup Provider EMS SQL Backup SQL Server D Destination folder C Backups t Backup Source History Select files B Server tio sal20 14 7 Es Add Local File Database Type Encrypted Storage name First LSN AdventureWorks Full True C Backups MSSQLSERVER_ 32140000000217 T Zim CS ET Add Local File Click this button to search for the backup files on the selected server If backup consists of multiple files this option is only available for EMS SQL Backup type you need to specify the first fil
240. o create a template from the existing policy Proceed to the Policies tab and select Create template from policy from policy s popup menu 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 15 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual The program provides a set of standard templates To of Import and E Export templates to an external xm file use the of Import Template and EP Export Template context items correspondingly To create a template copy select it in the list of templates and use the Clone Template context menu item See also Getting Started Servers Policies Activities Maintenance Actions Options 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 160 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 1 Policy templates The Policy Templates page allows you to manage policy templates Policy template is a preset policy that can be used for creating new policies on its basis You can add or edit its settings in the process of policy creation afterwards ES EMS SQL Backup Administration Console o th Servers Policies Templates Activities Templates Policy Templates View Name Description E Preset templates Templates provided by EMS 2 Policy Templates System databases maintenance For the system databases master model and msdb Task Templates Typical data warehouse maintenance For small and medium sized databases with low data change rate
241. o run the License Deactivation Wizard 2 select the preferable license deactivation method and complete the set of wizard steps 3 make sure that the deactivation process has been completed successfully the license information in the overall status window must disappear and license must become inactive in the Members Area Steps Selecting deactivation method Web site deactivation Performing online deactivation Completing operation See also Purchasing License activation 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd z EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 5 2 1 Selecting deactivation method Use this step to set license deactivation method ES License Desctivetion AAT x Welcome to EMS SQL Backup License Deactivation wizard Step 1 of 3 This wizard is used to deactivate EMS SQL Backup product license Your license key will be deactivated and EMS SQL Backup will not work with this SQL Sever instance After deactivation this wizard informs EMS that this license key is deactivated and you will be able to activate it on another SQL Server instance Select one of the following deactivation methods Deactivate EMS SQL Backup License online Use this option if you have an Internet connection Product license will be deactivated automatically within a few seconds Deactivate EMS SQL Backup License through our website This option allows you to deactivate product license using license inf
242. odel both servers have access to the shared folder The databases restored on the destination server stay in Restoring or Standby mode Note This step is not included into Quick Maintenance Action list It can be only executed within the Policy To perform scheduled log shipping on a regular basis you need to include this task into Policy 1 At Step 2 of the Create Policy wizard click Create new step button and select Transaction Log Shipping step type 2 Also you can create a new Step Template for further use selecting Transaction Log Shipping step at the Templates tab Steps of the Transaction Log Shipping wizard Naming template Specify database pairs Specify backup options Specify folders and recovery options Performing operation See also Backup Database Restore Database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Shrink Database Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 24 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 12 1 Naming step You can name the step using the Name field The Description field can be used to define brief info for the created step Set step name and description Step 1 of 5 The Log Shipping step manages creating of transaction log backups on the source server and their restoring on destination s
243. ole User manual Restore all records of transaction log Select this option to make a complete restore from transaction log backup Restore all records of transaction log before This option indicates that database restore is based on the transaction log records added before specified date Pick date and specify time in the fields below Restore all records of transaction log up to market transaction Use this option to restore database to the state when marked transaction was committed Mark name Specify the needed mark in the field Look for marks at or after You need to define the start date time point to search for the marked transaction from V Include marked transaction Enable this option to restore database to the state right after the transaction committing If the option is disabled then database will be restored to the state right before the transaction committing v Kill connections Set this option to kill all existing connections to the database before starting the restore process otherwise restore will fail if any connections exist Note If this option is checked when the Backup the transaction log before proceeding with the restore is checked then connections will be killed before the backup tail log process starts Check orphaned users Check this option to detect orphaned users on restore process v Drop orphaned users If this option is checked then found orphaned users will be dropped on
244. on See also Backup database Execute SOL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 335 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 6 1 Name and description This page allows you to view edit the step name and description Shrink system DB Shrinks the size of the data files in the system database Task name Use this field to name the step Description This field allows you to define step description 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 33 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 6 2 General At this page you can edit general options for Shrink Database step G IE Shrink Database editor Shrink system DB x Select a page T Shrink database when it exceeds 50 MB Name amp description aes Fg Selection Amount of free space to remain after shrink 10 Retain freed space in database files Return freed space to operating system Suppress informational messages Shrink database when it exceeds Set database size limit Database will be shrunk when its size goes over this limit Amount of free space to remain after shrink Use this field to define perce
245. on server The destination database must be the restored copy of the source database and be in Restoring state If the destination database does not exist you can select lt Create new gt item in the Destination DB column and specify its name in the New database column If the destination database needs rewriting set the corresponding flag in the Overwrite column Creating and overwriting of the databases is performed by creating a full backup of the source database and its further restoring Even in case of scheduled execution creating of a database is executed once immediately on wizard finish and the lt Create new gt item will be replaced with the created database name afterwards 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 26 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Data folder Specify the path for data MDF files for the newly created database Log folder Specify the path for data LDF files for the newly created database Note When creating a template no databases can be selected at this step Please proceed to the next steps to set default template options Databases can be selected on applying the template to the policy lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 287 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 12 3 Specifying backup options At this step you can define backup options for source database s amp Log Shipping
246. oom_server tserv2005 VIE deimos sqi2012 VID olivia aschel sql2014 ce History Cleanup step wizard History Cleanup step 1 Step 2 of 4 lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Servers Select the Server s to clean history If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode Server description and version are displayed on the right panel lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd Next step gt gt 23 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 5 3 Selecting historical data At this step of the wizard you need to define the history that should be deleted Q3 History Cleanup step wizard History Cleanup step 1 gt l mesm Select historical data Step 3 of 4 Select historical data to delete MS SQL Server V Backup and restore data older than 24 Month s Z History of Server Agent jobs older than 241 Month s ka EMS SQL Backup V Backup and restore data older than 2 Month s Z V Log records of SQL Backup older than 2 Month s Iz Gt Day s Week s Year s Hep lt Back Next gt Finish auCancelw MS SQL Server The following options are intended to delete MS SQL backup history and some log info concerning specific jobs performed by MS SQL Server means W Backup and restore hist
247. opens the policy template editor a Delete Template Ctri Delete removes the template EP Export Template Lf Import Template I Clone Template create a copy of the selected template How to create a policy based on the template Use the gt Maintenance Policies 2 Create Policy from Template item form the popup menu at the Policies page or use the 2 Create from templates item fromthe popup menu at the Servers page 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 161 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual How to create a template from the existing policy Proceed to the Policies page and select Create template from policy from policy s popup menu See also Task templates Step templates Schedule template 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 12 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 1 1 Creating template from policy If you already have a configured policy you can create a template on its basis which can be later used for creating a new policy It will contain all tasks steps and schedules of this policy with their defined parameters In order to create a template based on a policy select the necessary policy in the list on the Policies tab and then choose the 4 Create Template from Policy context menu item In the dialog appeared enter a Template name and define whether databases selected in the policy should be saved in the template being cre
248. operation will return an error Set the authentication parameters for uploading backup files to the specified directory Note that the specified user should have sufficient rights to write to the target folder You can choose Windows Authentication or provide User name and Password in the corresponding fields You can check the access to the specified folder by clicking the Test button You will be offered to select servers over which the connection should be checked 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 388 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 8 2 3 2 FTP Connection The FTP Connection Settings dialog is provided for configuring FTP Server connection for uploading backup files Host address aschel Remote folder backups Anonymous logon User name tester Password SE Protocol FTP Standard Port 21 Mode Passive PASV x HTTP proxy W Server aschel Port 8080 User name testtest Password PRISE Timeout 60 sec Test genes ep Name Specify the name for the connection The connection name must be unique among all that were already created Host address Define the FTP host address Here you can enter server name or its IP address without specifying protocol Remote folder Define the directory on the FTP server where backup files will be uploaded If the specified directory doe
249. or Create new options On the third step of the wizard specify the directory on the source server for storing transaction log backups of the source database Also set backup parameters On the fourth step you need to set the backup shared folder Network shared folder for copying transaction log backups of the source database Backup files will be transferred to the directory set in the Destination folder field Both source and destination servers should have access to this folder otherwise log shipping cannot be performed If you are creating or overwriting a database then after Transaction Log Shipping wizard completion the full source database backup copy is created on a destination server The destination database is in the restoring state Transaction log shipping will be performed according to the schedule set in the service task Note On the first step of the policy with Transaction Log Shipping step you need to set Use local Console time as absolute time option 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 46 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 8 Monitor server productivity counters Using the Database Parameters Logger maintenance operation you can monitor database parameters and receive notifications when their values do not match specified conditions To receive warnings about possible faults you need to include Database Parameters Logger step in a policy Also you can execute this maintena
250. or F5 key E Maintenance Policies E Create new Policy 28 Create from Templates to create a policy based on the created template Convert from Maintenance Plan runs the Maintenance plan conversion wizard A Quick Maintenance Actions open the list of Maintenance Actions for quick launch Show history opens the Viewing Policy History window t Collapse all groups g Expand all groups See also Group popup menu Server popup menu Database popup menu 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 62 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 1 2 Group popup menu The popup menu is available at the Group node at DB Explorer _ Create New Group Insert Delete Group Rename Group F2 ah Register Server Ctrl Insert 2 Refresh F5 5 Maintenance Policies x Create New Policy Quick Maintenance Actions gt gt Create from Templates Show History amp Addto Shortcuts Shift Insert Collapse L Create New Group or Ins key Delete Group Rename Group or F2 key ah Register server The Register Server Wizard is started 2 Refresh group subobjects Maintenance Policies ih Create New Policy 7 24 Copy from Templates to create a policy based on the created template 2 Quick Maintenance Actions open the list of Maintenance Actions for quick launch g Show history opens the Viewing Policy History window amp Add to shortcuts the selected object or Shift Ins t Collapse all gr
251. or policies tasks steps and schedules Activities for managing current active processes Toolbars A toolbar is a horizontal row of selectable image buttons that give the user a constantly visible reminder of and an easy way to select certain application functions 4 D roe M amp ig Toolbars are available on Servers and Policies tabs See also EMS SOL Backup overview Policy overview 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 5 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 Servers This chapter contains sufficient information concerning server management and policy execution Below you can see the overall information about basic working area sections EG EMS SQL Backup Administration Console Lo Servers Policies Templates Activities Servers Le La 1 M LEE 4 Activity g 4 gt Groups Policies summary Total 4 Successful 4 Failed 0 Alerted 0 Unknown 0 4 local Policies are successful GE 4 ka UTC 6 I l amp ka sglexpress SQL Server status Started 7 4 remote Version 09 00 5057 Developer Edition l D doom_server tserv2005 Add new poli Agent status Started D aschel sal2008 4 amp SQL Backup server side components 4 gt Solutions Version 1 5 0 8366 1 0 16 1 4 gt Solution 1 Service status Started Online ka airs amp Policies B doom_server tserv2005 4 Databases Name Server Next Launch Status En CE SS a doom_server tserv2005
252. orical data Performing operation See also Backup Database Restore Database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Shrink Database Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 26 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 5 1 Naming step You can name the step using the Name field The Description field can be used to define brief info for the created step 3 History Cleanup step wizard History Cleanup step 1 Set step name and description Step 1 of 4 The History Cleanup step deletes all kinds of historical data MS SQL Server backup and restore info MS SQL Server Agent log records EMS SQL Backup backups and service operation log records This wizard allows you to specify type and age of data to be deleted Name History Cleanup step 1 Description This step does not appear for Quick Maintenance Actions Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 237 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 5 2 Selecting server Use this step of the wizard to select servers for history cleanup Choose servers for deanup history m Servers 79 an je aschel sql2008 Description 18 ka sglexpress TE dean_winxp sql2008r2 ID 192 168 66 53 M 2 d
253. ormation from your Member Account on our web site The license deactivation process does not provide any personally identifiable information of you to EMS Deactivate EMS SQL Backup License online Use this option if you have Internet connection Product license will be deactivated automatically within a few seconds Deactivate EMS SQL Backup License through our website This option allows you to deactivate product license using license information from your Member Account on our web site To proceed to the next step of the Wizard check the I understand that License Key will be deactivated now On clicking the Next button the license will be deactivated locally This means that the license for an SQL Server instance will be deactivated in the EMS SQL Backup program but you won t be able to activate this license key on another instance Note To complete the deactivation process you need to finish this Wizard Next step in case of online deactivation Next step in case of website deactivation 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 5 2 2 Web site deactivation This step appears only in case the Deactivate EMS SQL Backup License through our website option was selected on the first step E License Deactivation Wizard tio sql2012 xe Manual product license deactivation Step 2 of 2 Follow these steps to deactivate EMS SQL Backup license
254. orming OP TATONE EEE dent dat s anges anses etat door dede annee barre di oner nf ne EEEO EE EARE Re Organize Indices eee Kea aaea aar aaaea ne Ra iSS EAEan Naming step Selecting objects De Pin CUES sca tes es cence A Etre A a tn Sanpete Be bts AA Advanced Option Siin ne mr rene drain dan nn Ne EE Pr r in date ennemi penis ee Performing Operation LL en ne d oc Sah ated eA dt cnrs niet le nse a etre de net dti Shrink Database Naming Stepko 1er esse AE shee suspavies sake suite denteetechcedehws sstwvedstvaaunexs feuachsatanrieveesdezenatazentenieatene Sel cting database RE A duet tou uses dame vin ide dore nie ane en SOMING OPONSE aeaa E E A Ea a Aaa Aa ae sesudsaadatanegitvtcs teen et eds tee den P rformng Op ration e a a E Mur AEEKO EA SEA PERES Update Statistiese ae nn ne CEEA E Sarea ESES Aat SAE oaae Atao DEAE NE nine menace Naming ST DL 2 dr nn a A A vanced A A E E NA Selecting OpjeC iS menar a a a a a aa AA Setting options Performing OPEN atiON 4x5 acters cusecuchseiassascancustesttsiussaneesdepherinsveosstuagintitenteandeaesstezeoyievecgdevansizssatendeatess Database Parameters Logger ii siiiiannrnrnrarnnennennennennnnnesnesnesnesneeneeneaneanranraaneaneanennnes 269 Namna Stepi ES re a Meettsaresashbestdstchuesachstetdestasds E Ea a r E Sel cting data DaS e en See eae AR APR A TR ne A A ey Setting conditions Performing operation Maintenance Cle anulp cccscssssscssesestesseseessesses
255. orming operation 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 6 4 Configuring installation settings On this step you need to configure all settings necessary for server side components install update uninstall process Eo EMS SQL Backup Server side Components Installation v1 5 0 8351 x Welcome to the Installation wizard Step 1 of 1 Welcome to the Installation wizard Select SQL Server instances for installing upgrading removing EMS SQL Backup server side components 7 SQL2014 Connection Service account Installer SQL Server login sa with password Service Windows log on Local System Service SQL Server login as service log on user V MSSQLSERVER Connection Service account Installer SQL Server login as current Windows user Service Windows log on Local System Service SQL Server login as service log on user Next gt Install l Cancel First select the action you want to perform Install Select this option to install EMS SQL Backup server side components Update Select this option to upgrade or restore EMS SQL Backup server side components Use this option to keep the service up to date Uninstall Select this option to remove EMS SQL Backup server side components Jobs created by the EMS SQL Backup will be uninstalled from the selected server After that check instances on which you want to install update delete server s
256. ory data older than Enable the option to clean the history of the MS SQL Server backup and restore operations that are older than specified period of time After cleanup the information about SQL Server type backups performed by EMS SQL Backup or by SQL Server itself will be removed from the server W History data of Server Agent job older than Enable the option to clean the history of the SQL Server Agent job s that are older than specified period of time After this cleanup all information about SQL Server Agent job execution will be removed from the server EMS SQL Backup The following options are intended to delete some log info concerning tasks performed by EMS SQL Backup 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual WI Backup and restore history data older than Enable the option to clean the history of the backup and restore operations that are older than specified period of time After cleanup the information about EMS SQL Backup type backups will be removed from EMS SQL Backup v Log records of EMS SQL Backup older than Enable the option to clean the history of the EMS SQL Backup task s execution that are older than specified period of time After cleanup the information about executed tasks will be removed from History Viewer lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 20 EMS SQL Backup Administ
257. ository fad AdventureWorks_maintenance tig deanup_stats_SQLAdministratorRepository iy Stats_upd fad deanup_alarm_log_SQLAdministratorRepository fi AW_Maintenance Subplan_1 Bp AW_Maintenance Subplan_2 fg shrink AdventureWorks lab ob cr ShrinkUserDatabases Subplan_1 lt Back Next gt Finish Select the server s in the Servers list and add the job from the Available SQL Server Agent jobs list to Selected SQL Server Agent jobs in execution order list using button or double clicking Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode If the server name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server You can re arrange jobs order for execution using arrow buttons on the right a Le Use 28 petete button or Delete key to remove job from the list lt lt Previous ste Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 3 3 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start job s execution Agent job step wizard Execute Server Agent job step 1 Click Finish to create step item Step 3 of 3 Verify the choices made in the wizard Step Name Execute SQL Server Agent job step 1 Kind Execute SQL Server Agent job step Selection of SQL Agent s jobs doom_
258. oups g Expand all groups See also Groups popup menu Server popup menu Database popup menu 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd e EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 1 3 Server popup menu This popup menu is available for the server at DB Explorer _ Create New Group Insert a Register Server Ctrl Insert Unregister Server 1 Server Properties Get Backup to Console e Disconnect 2 Refresh F5 Maintenance Policies A gt Create New Policy 7 Quick Maintenance Actions gt gt Create from Templates O Show History a Convert from Maintenance Plan l Server side Components Properties ji Pause All Policies on Server ES Update Remove server side SOL Backup components Ap Resume All Policies on Server Activate license on tio sql2014 Deactivate license on tio sql2014 Send bug report to EMS amp Add to Shortcuts Shift Insert ie Expand L Create New Group or Ins key ah Register Server launches the Register Server Wizard Unregister Server E view Server Properties get backup file from the server to the console side B Refresh server subobjects and policies or F5 key Maintenance Policies E Create new Policy 28 Create from Templates to create a policy based on the created template 8 Convert from Maintenance Plan runs the Maintenance plan conversion wizard ii Pause All Policies on Server stops policy scheduled execution unt
259. oved automatically Store logs up to Set the preferable maximum size in Mb of a log file Note This value is limited to 3328 megabytes of data Note If the log file size reaches this specified value then both tasks and backups log records are truncated Log file truncation is not performed simultaneously on reaching specified boundary values 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 103 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 104 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 84 Backup settings At the Backup settings tab you need to set folder which will be used as a default folder for storing backup files le Server side Components Properties aa Select a page w SQL Server connection info CR Email settings Log storage settings E Backup folder C Backups Note This folder appears as a backup_root_folder in a backup step Backup folder Define the folder for storing backups created by Backup Database wizard Click the Es button to open the Server folder dialog to pick up the needed server folder Note This folder is tagged as a backup_root_folder in a backup step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 105 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 9 Get backup to Console The Get Backup to Console wizard guides you through the process of transferring
260. p 4 of5 Free space Reorganize pages with the default amount of free space Change free space per page percentage to 0 T Pad index V Sort results in tempdb Keep index online while reindexing Hep lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Free space Define which pages should be reorganized ones with the default or specified amount of free space per page W Pad index Enable this option to leave the space open on each page in the intermediate levels of index W Sort results in tempdb This option indicates that intermediate sort results used to rebuild indices will be stored in the tempdb database W Ignore duplicate keys If the option is enabled then duplicate keys will be ignored W Keep index online while reindexing This option determines whether concurrent user access to the underlying table or clustered index data and any associated non clustered indexes is allowed while reindexing 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 254 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 255 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 7 5 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start reorganizing indices Click Finish to create step item Step 5 of 5 V
261. p in case of manual activation 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 22 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 5 1 2 Entering license key This step appears if you have chosen online activation on the first step amp License Activation wizard tio sql2014 lt To begin the license activation process you must provide the wizard with your license information Step 2 of 4 SQL Server Instance ID 8801F36400000000 1652 Activate license key DWE02 3U90W 21CBX ASS5N TKGIM WSSHOI 6P 7YD 0265G 1K20Q Activate Free license The ID is generated automatically Complete the required license information and click the Next button mon SQL Server Instance ID In this field you can see the registrable instance ID that was generated automatically Activate license key Enter manually or paste your license key here The license key can be copied from the Members Area or from the e mail that is received after license purchasing Activate Free license Select this option to activate the SQL Backup Free license You can view the list of all functional differences between EMS SQL Backup versions in the Feature Matrix Next step in case of online activation 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 23 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 5 1 3 Web site activation This step appears only in case the Activate EMS SQL B
262. page Name Saturday night at 1 o clock Description Eil General At the General tab of the editor set parameters for the schedule C3 Schedule editor Friday night at 1 o clock x Select a page A V Enabled F Name amp description Sie zj Recurring from date D Start once Frequency Occurs Weekly y fromdate 15 04 2014 todate Recurs every 14 week s on Mon Tue Wed E Thu V Fri Sat E Sun Daily frequency Occurs once at 1 00 00 Recurs every 15 from 0 00 00 to 0 00 00 Note For SQL Server Express edition Built in Scheduler is used by default Enabled This option indicates whether schedule is active or not Schedule type This section allows you to define schedule type Start automatically when SQL Server Agent starts This option indicates that tasks associated with this schedule will be launched when SQL Server Agent is started Select this option to launch tasks associated with this schedule when SQL Server Agent is started 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 182 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Start whenever the CPUs become idle Use this option to start tasks associated with this schedule whenever CPUs become idle This option indicates that tasks associated with the schedule will be launched whenever CPUs become
263. period counter worked incorrectly in some cases Fixed now The decompression file errors for some configurations were fixed At times the shrinking of log files of EMS SQL Backup failed Fixed now Lots of other improvements and bug fixes OANA UA 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 35 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Version 1 4 1 The product is renamed into EMS SQL Backup 2 License Manager is a very useful license key management 3 Server side components updater multiple update of server side components To start Administration Console you do not need Administrator privileges Task scheduler errors are fixed Dates localization errors are fixed Memory leaks are fixed Other small improvements and bug fixes o N g Gi Version 1 3 Support of remote storages to upload and store backups e Network folders network attached storages NAS e Upload using FTP ImplicitSSL ExplicitSSL SFTP SSH protocols e Support of cloud storage Amazon S3 Possibility to add unlimited number of remote and local storages for each backup Support of Check orphaned users option to restore backups New macros for backup folders backup_root_folder server Log efficiency and representation are improved Improved design Ha TES NM Version 1 2 e Added the possibility to verify the integrity of the resulted files after the backup process RESTORE VERIFYONLY amp CHECKSUM Displayin
264. port for MySQL Export your data to any of 20 most popular data formats including MS Access MS Excel MS Word PDF HTML and more Data Import for MySQL Import your data from MS Access MS Excel and other popular formats to database tables via user friendly wizard interface Data Pump for MySQL Migrate from most popular databases MySQL PostgreSQL Oracle DB2 InterBase Firebird etc to MySQL Data Generator for MySQL Generate test data for database testing purposes in a simple and direct way Wide range of data generation parameters DB Comparer for MySQL Compare and synchronize the structure of your databases Move changes on your development database to production with ease oe dd B DB Extract for MySQL Create database backups in the form of SQL scripts save your database structure and table data as a whole or partially SQL Query for MySQL Analyze and retrieve your data build your queries visually work with query plans build charts based on retrieved data quickly and more amp Data Comparer for MySQL Compare and synchronize the contents of your databases Automate your data migrations from development to production database sil Scroll to top 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 3 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Microsoft SQL Sd SQL Management Studio for SQL Server EMS SQL Management Studio for SQL Server is a complete solution for database admi
265. port is available when a particular task is selected in the Policies area This report displays a detailed information on a task and its steps of the selected policy including task name planned start time started time finished task step status and execution message information warning or error 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 416 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 18 Ensure simultaneous policy execution on servers from different time zones To ensure simultaneous policy tasks launches on servers located in different time zones you need to select the Use local Console time as absolute time option on the first step of the policy wizard In this case a policy will be executed on all servers at the time corresponding to the local EMS SQL Backup Console taking into consideration time zones where servers are located 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 417 9 19 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Report bugs and suggestions If you want to report a bug occurred in the application or just provide some feedback you can do it directly from the EMS SQL Backup Before reporting bugs and suggestions make sure you are using the latest version of the EMS SQL Backup To create an e mail with attached bug report files automatically do the following 1 select the server on which the problem occurred in the Servers tree 2 choose the Send bug report to EMS its con
266. pplied e a sequence of file restores is used and the database is not intended to be usable between two of the restore operations Standby leaves database in read only and standby mode This option allows the database to be brought up for read only access between transaction log restores and can be used with either warm standby server situations or special recovery situations in which it is useful to inspect the database between log restores Undo file name Specify the undo file name so that the recovery effects can be undone The same undo file can be used for consecutive restores of the same database 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 367 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual NB If free disk space is exhausted on the drive containing the specified undo file name the restore operation stops Set VI Kill connections to destination database option ON to forced disconnection of all processes We recommend to check it if Overwrite option has been set at Step 2 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 11 3 Selection This page allows you to edit database selection to ship transaction logs Log Shipping step editor Log Shipping step 1 l Select a page Source server Destination server 2 Name amp description doom_server
267. provided policy task step name planned start time actual start time finish time execution status and message Launches Filter Off Ej Planned Start Started Finished Status Message 2 25 10 2013 17 58 01 25 10 2013 17 58 01 Fail Show details l EA Backup DB 25 10 2013 17 57 41 25 10 2013 17 57 42 Ignored S 4 Backup DB 25 10 2013 17 10 00 25 10 2013 17 10 01 25 10 2013 17 10 03 Success 4 Backup system DB 25 10 2013 17 10 01 25 10 2013 17 10 03 Success Show details ng Backup DB 25 10 2013 16 10 00 25 10 2013 16 10 00 25 10 2013 16 10 03 Success Backup DB 25 10 2013 15 10 00 25 10 2013 15 10 00 25 10 2013 15 10 02 Success E Backup DB 25 10 2013 14 10 00 25 10 2013 14 10 01 25 10 2013 14 10 03 Success You can view a detailed information on every step execution by clicking the Show details button in the Message colurm for the selected step ES Launch of Database Parameters Logger step 1 step details Ea Started 07 02 2014 11 58 17 Finished 07 02 2014 11 58 20 Status Warning Message 07 02 2014 11 58 20 Warning Some of watched parameters are out of range a Details 1 No backup exists for hr 2 No backup exists for vcs 3 Last log backups for hr are older than 1 day s 4 Last log backups for LargeDB are older than 1 day s 5 Last log backups for msdb are older than 1 day s 6 Last log backups for vcs are older than 1 day s 7 Last integrity check for hr is olde
268. ption we local sql20 14cs C2 Cloud Cloud s3 backupsstest test Standard Mask bkp MG tio sqi2014 Provider EMS SQL Backup Path C Backups File type Backups Extension bkp B E Server Provider MS SQL Server Path C Backups File type Reports Extension txt lt Back Next gt Finish Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed out the Backup service is not run installed or there is no connection to the server Note Selecting servers is not available in Template mode Use 1 aa file or folder specification to add a cleanup destination and Beat specification remove selected specification for appropriate actions Cleanup specification In this dialog you can define locations or files to be cleared on the server or cloud storage 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 279 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Eo Define items to clear rx Location Server Cloud storage Provider EMS SQL Backup MS SOL Server Xcessssesssecctsesavsrconseenssesnse Folder C Backups T Extension bak Indude first4evel subfolders File type Backups Za Location Select Server if you want to clear folders files stored on your server locally Select Cloud storage if you want to delete files located on the cloud Server Provider Select whether the files created by EMS SQL Backup or SQL Server will be cl
269. pying and moving objects within the policy B copy the selected object cut the selected object paste the copied cut object When you create a new object from the template the following Templates list dialog is opened You need to check the items you need to add and click the OK button If you check several items the corresponding number of policies will be created Eg Item selection SE Select step template s to apply Name Description ne A Checks the allocation structural and logical integrity of all the objects in 4 DB integrity check the datat V Reorganize DB indices Reorganizes one or more indices for a table in the databases gt ai E Shrinks the size of the data files in the databases Updates information about the distribution of key values in the database tables F Backup transaction log Backs up transaction log lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 1 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 23 Defining notification options EMS SQL Backup administrator can receive electronic notifications on the results of EMS SQL Backup policy launch via e mail At this step you can set notifications for the policy ja Policy wizard test_policy Define options for notification Step 3 of 4 SQL Backup administrator can receive electronic notifications on the results of SQL Backup policy l
270. r mode and has failed policies single user mode and has some warnings on policy execution see CSCO s in sin s in s in database database database database recovering state and does not have policies recovering state and all policies have succeeded status recovering state and has failed policies recovering state and has some warnings on policy execution eee database database database database s in s in s in s in restoring state and does not have policies restoring state and all policies have succeeded status restoring state and has failed policies restoring state and has some warnings on policy execution GA database i ZA database i database i T database i suspect and does not have policies suspect and all policies have succeeded status suspect and has failed policies suspect and has some warnings on policy execution DW O database is inactive D 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 4 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 10 2 Backup Converter Utility This utility is used for converting EMS SQL Backup backup files to standard MS SQL Server backup files It is run in console mode only Usage lt path to ConvertUtil exe tool gt ConvertUtil exe I nputFile file_name O utputFile file_name D atabases name n H elp Help Plassword password The path to this utility is C Program Files
271. r than 7 day s 8 Last integrity check for LargeDB is older than 7 day s 9 Last integrity check for msdb is older than 7 day s 10 Last integrity check for vcs is older than 7 day s The dialog appeared displays information about step execution start and finish time result execution status and detailed information about maintenance actions results If a step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 146 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual has a failed status the reason of failed execution will be displayed in the Message field 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 147 4 9 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Resolve problem The policy can result in Warning Error or Missed status You can manage policy status overview at the Servers page After detecting that some of your policies tasks have failed you can resolve the problem tasks by marking the problem as ignored and if needed execute the task once again To run the Resolve task dialog double click the erroneous policy at the Policies list at Servers page or use the corresponding menu item for task or policy DB integrity check Backup DB task s of System databases maintenance policy failed or didn t run To resolve the issue you can execute the task s manually and mark problem tasks as ignored In this case last run problem task s status will be changed to Ignor
272. r the list of databases will be the following Databases By List z z E These databases VO VIO awe ME master G model ME msdb FE AdventureWorks JA AdventureWorks_20100419 VS DemoDB ME Largeds E Eo new_db m Clean Mismatches Click the Clean Mismatches button to delete the missed databases from the list for the policy cannot be executed for them 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 357 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 210 Maintenance Cleanup Maintenance Cleanup step editor provides the same set of options as Maintenance Cleanup wizard The following pages are available in this dialog Name_and description General Selection See also Backup database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SOL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Shrink Database Reorganize Indices Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd ss EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 10 1 Name and description This page allows you to view edit the step name and description Maintenance Cleanup step 1 Task name Use this field to name the step Description This field allows you to define step description 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 35 EMS SQL Backup Administratio
273. ransaction log VIG ka 18 master 1 model Remove inactive entries 4 ka sqlexpress 8 aH ee eee nc AES EL dean_winxp sql2008r2 Leave in restoring state a cure 718 AdventureWorks E Copy onl 1 HE deimos sgl20 12 718 DemoDB olivia B hr 78 LargeDB orphaned JB TEST 18 ves xtraLargeDB Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Backup Type Use this parameter to define the backup type Database full a full database backup which backs up the entire database including the transaction log Database differential a differential backup which only records the changes made to the data in the database after the last full database backup Transaction log a sequence of log backups provided for a continuous chain of transaction information to support recovery forward from database differential or file backups Set Remove inactive entries option on to truncate the live transaction log when you create a backup Set VW Leave in restoring state on to leave the database in restoring state to be unavailable to users until it is completely restored Set Copy only option to create a copy only backup which is a SQL Server backup that is independent of the sequence of conventional SQL Server backups 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 197 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Servers Select the servers to run the operation on If the servers name icon is grayed
274. ration console User manual 7 1 5 4 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start cleaning the history data History Cleanup step wizard Click Finish to create step item Step 4 of 4 Verify the choices made in the wizard Step Name History Cleanup step 1 Kind History Cleanup step Server selection ka deimos sgl20 12 olivia Options Clean MS SQL Server backup and restore data older than 2 Month s Clean MS SQL Server Agent job history older than 2 Month s Clean SQL Backup backup and restore data older than 2 Month s Clean SQL Backup task log records older than 2 Month s After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Finish button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2a EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 6 Database Integrity Check Database Integrity Check step allows you to perform the check database operation on the server the DBCC CHECKDB Transact SQL statement is issued This operation is used to check the allocation structural and logical integrity of all the objects in the specified database To launch the database check immediately select Quick Maintenance Actions Database Integrity Check popup menu item in the Servers tab To perform scheduled database integr
275. re will be no need to waste your time on tiresome data conversion Advanced Data Export will do the task quickly and will give the result in the desired format Advanced Data Import Component Suite for Delphi and C Builder will allow you to Pq Advanced Data Import import your data to the database from files in the most popular data formats 30 gt Advanced PDF Generator f Advanced PDF Generator for Delphi gives you an opportunity to create PDF documents with your applications written on Delphi or C Builder Advanced Query Builder Advanced ste Builder is a powerful component suite for Borland Delphi and C Builder intended for visual building SQL statements for the SELECT INSERT UPDATE and DELETE clauses Advanced Excel Report for Delphi is a powerful band oriented generator of template based reports in MS Excel L Advanced Excel Report Advanced Localizer Advanced Localizer is an indispensable component suite for Delphi for adding multilingual support to your applications Source Rescuer at EMS Source Rescuer is an easy to use wizard application for Borland Delphi and C py Builder which can help you to restore your lost source code Scroll to top 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 2 Getting Started EMS SQL Backup provides you with an ability to contribute to efficient SQL Server administration and de
276. rees and the allocation consistency of the database Designed to provide a small overhead check of the physical consistency of the database this check can also detect torn pages checksum failures and common hardware failures that can compromise a user s data If Data Purity option DATA_PURITY is enabled the DBCC CHECKDB statement checks the database for column values that are not valid or out of range Exclusive access options limit the checks that are performed 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 246 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Snapshot Enable the option to use an internal database snapshot for the transactional consistency needed to perform database integrity checks Lock Table If this option TABLOCK is used the DBCC CHECKDB statement obtains locks instead of using an internal database snapshot This includes a short term database exclusive lock vi All error messages This option ALL_ERRORMSGS displays an unlimited number of errors per object vi No info messages This option NO_INFOMSGS suppresses all informational messages lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 247 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 6 4 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start checking database integrity
277. remove EMS SQL Backup perform the following operations 1 Remove server side components from all servers they were installed This is done by means of Update Remove server side EMS SQL Backup components that is launched by selecting the Update Remove server side EMS SQL Backup components server context menu item 2 Remove EMS SQL Backup Administration Console from your computer via Control Panel gt Programs and Features Note If you do not have permissions for remote of server side components uninstall via EMS SQL Backup Administration Console you can copy EMS SQL Backup setup file to the server machine and run installation there Server side components remove process locally on a server is similar to their installation process and is performed by means of Stand alone remote components Installer To remove server components you need to select the 9 Uninstall All option on the second step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 4 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 22 Use Free version of EMS SQL Backup In order to use EMS SQL Backup Free version you need to activate the Free license key Note that for activating Free license you need Internet connection 1 Open the License activation wizard from the SQL Server instance context menu 2 On the first step of the wizard select the Activate EMS SQL Backup License online option 3 On the second step of the wizard select the Free option as a Lic
278. right panel lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 232 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 4 3 Defining T SQL statement Use this step to define a T SQL statement to be executed Execute T SQL Statement step wizard Execute T SQL Statement step 1 X Enter T SQL statement body Step 3 of 4 T SQL statement delete from dbo projects_cache go delete from dbo activities_cache go Execute timeout 54 sec toad Save Checkstatement lt Back next gt Finish Cancel Type the T SQL statement in the Query text tab Use the Execute timeout field to define time restriction for checking the statement procedure Use the Check statement button to run the statement on the server in PARSEONLY mode to ensure that T SQL statement is correct The detailed log of errors is displayed at the Errors tab Note The Check statement button is not available in Template mode Use Load Save buttons for loading or saving the script from to an internal file All errors are displayed on the Errors tab 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 233 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Enter T SQL statement body Query text Errors lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 24 EMS SQL Backup Administration console
279. rms you may create a printed copy of this documentation solely for your own personal use Conversion to other formats is allowed as long as the actual content is not altered or edited in any way Document generated on 15 07 2015 3 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Table of Contents Part I Part Il Part Ill Welcome to EMS SQL Backup 12 Wat s HDEW corens creeis E aaa RE saneucaanss cceteuseeecaacsetebeusseetaas spaceneusseecaed 13 System re Quire MEMNts noiai an Enan aE aN EEA NENN AANER E NANREN ERE Aa NANNE ENERE EAA 14 aileen OM ETE E us E E A E AET E E E E E EN 15 PuUrcha Sin 5 885 nn nee AN EPET EEA EN nn EEA EERE 16 How to register SQL Backup cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeneeeses License activation sssri nain egare ao aa adaa edeg a mienne aoad aaa AEAN ren aa iadaaa dep daraa aaia Selecting license activation method Entering license key Web site activation Entering license activation code Performng online activation s tirs een anne d e min N otre ne aa Completing Op ratiOn ri MT RAR te Ads Saute Il i nent der sienne dela etage desde de ses etage S Licensedeactivation 5 52155 514 5588 2 A DA ne rentree nr sien esse selecting deactivation methoden raeo ata wie ei nl A ne a ae et re nt Web Site deactiVation iscsi eden nine aria a ee eee Performing online deactivation aisaaiven ie A nr Rte et Completing operations tisse raaraa a
280. s Ltd 250 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 7 2 Selecting objects Use this step of the wizard to select objects for index reorganization Define database selection for servers Step 2 of 5 E Servers Databases By List E These tables ca 7 eB doom_server tserv2005 EzE HR ADDRESS EE aschel sql2008 DIE Ihe ADDRESSTYPE El ne la Objects By List PERRET ALES E ka sglexpress VES HumanResources ADDRESSTYPE MEL dean_winxp sql2008r2 Tables and Views X VIFS HumanResources Department 192 168 66 53 E These databases perse VIEX HumanResources Employee ne deimos sql2012 master 7 Eza HumanResources EmployeeAddress MO olivia model VES HHumanResources EmployeeDepartmentHistory eB aschel sql2014 8 msdb v 5 HumanResources EmployeePayHistory 79 PI Paseo PLOTS WE Demons VER HumanResources JobCandidate HS hr VIE HumanResources Shift TA Larges ER Person Address d FJB orphaned E These views s FB test La Sales vindividualDemographics B ves v ay HumanResources vJobCandidate xtraLargeDB W ay HumanResources vJobCandidateEducation v a HumanResources vJobCandidateEmployment
281. s is useful in either of the following situations e a restore script is being run and the log is always being applied e a sequence of file restores is used and the database is not intended to be usable between two of the restore operations Standby leaves database in read only and standby mode This option allows the database to be brought up for read only access between transaction log restores and can be used with either warm standby server situations or special recovery situations in which it is useful to inspect the database between log restores Undo file name Specify the undo file name so that the recovery effects can be undone The same undo file can be used for consecutive restores of the same database NB If free disk space is exhausted on the drive containing the specified undo file name the restore operation stops 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 222 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Restore Database step wizard Quick Restore Database step EE Specify additional options for restore process Step 4 of 5 Recovery options Recovery rollbacks all uncommitted transactions No recovery leaves the database in the restoring state Standby leaves database in read only and standby mode Undo file name V Back up the transaction log before proceeding with the restore Restore tail of log automatically V Replace WITH REPLACE Continue onerror Trans
282. s not exist on the server it will be created on the first upload process Set the authentication parameters for uploading backup files to the specified FTP server 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 38 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Note that the specified user should have sufficient rights to write to the target folder You can choose Anonymous logon or provide User name and Password in the corresponding fields Protocol Select the protocol that should be used for backup files transferring The possible values are e FTP Standard e FTPS Implicit SSL TLS e FTPS Explicit SSL TLS Port Specify the port the FTP connection should be executed through Mode Select the mode of the FTP connection The possible values are e Passive PASV e Active PORT If you have checked the W Use proxy option to connect to FTP you need to configure the following proxy settings Server Port User name and Password Timeout Specify the timeout in seconds when a connection will be timed out because of inactivity on the data channel You can check the access to the specified folder by clicking the Test button You will be offered to select servers over which the connection should be checked If the specified remote folder does not exist it will be created on performing test access 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd so EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manua
283. s tool of EMS SQL Backup you can create saved into EMS SQL Backup configuration policies tasks steps and schedules settings In order to create a template proceed to the Templates tab and choose an object type policy task step or schedule which template you want to create Then clickthe Add button located on the toolbar or in the context menu If you already have a configured policy on a group of databases or servers you can create its template In order to do this proceed to the Policies tab and select the 4 Create Template from Policy its context menu item Also you can create templates of existing tasks steps and schedules To do this you need to e open the policy including these objects in the policy editor e select the l Copy to Templates context menu item of the object which template you want to create All saved templates can be later used for creating policies In order to create a policy based on a template you need to select the 2 Create Policy from Template context menu item of a policies list on the Policies tab In the Item Selection dialog choose the needed template or several templates The policy editor will be opened All tasks included in the template will be automatically added to the policy being created In order to create a task step schedule based on a template in a policy use the Add New from Template context menu item or the toolbar corresponding button on the second step of the policy wizard The a
284. server tserv2005 check AdventureWorks DemoDB_shrink AdventureWorks log backup After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Finish button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 4 Execute T SQL statement Execute T SQL statement step allows you to execute any T SQL statement To launch the T SQL statement immediately select 2 Quick Maintenance Actions F Execute T SQL statement popup menu item in the Servers tab To perform scheduled T SQL statement execution on regular basis you need to include this task into Policy 1 At Step 2 of the Create Policy wizard click Create new step button and select Execute T SQL statement step type 2 Also you can create a new Step Template for further use selecting Execute T SQL statement step at the Templates tab Steps of the Execute T SQL statement wizard Naming template Selecting server Defining T SQL statement Performing operation See also Backup Database Execute SQL Server Agent job History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Shrink Database Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 230 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 71 41 Naming step You can nam
285. sesseeseesoeseusaesaessesseueesneseeseesnesaesaevaesaneaesonesnesaesaesaesaneenoneaneas 276 NAMING S D cS RI A ie SU EE SS A As OE vacua ER RE ee At Re 277 Selecting Tiles folders fOr Cl anup 4 25 sn E sienas ra Es A ETEINEN Ra PEPA ISAE e rE e SENEO RAE 278 D fi ing leanup rit rid 5is e a a A E A AA AAA A AEAEE 281 Fertormng operatio a saaran a oaa A a AA aaa Eie a E a aE AA Eea SARAS 282 Transaction L g Shipping 528 nn en en ee ee sent Sa aera arak 283 Naming step Specifying database pairs SPECIVING backup Options ryssar kenana te A re nt A er a a nee er die 287 Specifying folders and recovery options iii 289 Performing Operation rer nn seven tm nn Ai ar ane ttes e na aTa Lepa Aa nn dre Lente tnt ane ten nn dm d ESSAS an 291 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Database Shipping iininnrrrrnnnenernranrannannesneenennesnenneennenesnasnasnesnnsneene KO e ann aaneaneanennnes Naming Ste Drean tit van scatetesucesuaseasacheysiivendensendeucedehvasssteagdshivevbadasenscpuntans g n sde Fay La Een nee Specifying database pairs Specifying backup options Specifying folders and recovery options iii 298 View ng summa y INF OFMATON ss 5245 ra cede ns site Rennes e M ee dns fee eet ascot a Ea enfants 300 EOItING Ste E E A A A A A A A T E AATA 301 Backup database cccscssssessessesseeeseesese
286. side components on tio sql2014 Select the operation type Step 2 of 4 Update Modify upgrade or restore SQL Backup server side components Ma fa Uninstall Sy Uninstall SQL Backup server side components Remove logs Note Registration info will be deleted after deinstallation Update Select this option to upgrade or restore EMS SQL Backup server side components You can use this option to keep the service up to date Uninstall Select this option to remove SQL Backup server side components Jobs created by the EMS SQL Backup will be uninstalled from the selected server W Remove logs Check this option to clear the information about server policies and task execution history lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd at EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 43 Specifying service account settings At this step you should specify Windows account and SQL Server login for EMS SQL Backup Service Eo Installation wizard U e server side components on tio sql2014 X pol Specify Windows and SQL Server accounts for EMS SQL Backup Service Step 3 of 4 Windows account for EMS SQL Backup Service Log On Local System account NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM This account User Password SQL Server login for EMS SQL Backup Service Windows authentication SQL Server authentication re Pas
287. sor system increasing this value can fasten backup speed You are recommended to set one thread fewer than the number of processors Compression Enable the option to compress backup Compression Level Defines backup file compression level Use 1 for best speed and 9 for best compression WI Encryption Enable the option to encrypt backup Encryption Password Set and confirm password that is used for backup decryption Encryption Type Select the encryption algorithm 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd so EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 1 5 Backup file options At this page you can find backup file options G Backup Database step editor Backup system DB Se Select a page Name amp description Te r server Available tags backup root folder server B General E Selection Backup file name server _ database _ backup_type _ date bkp SQL Backup Available tags server database backup type date login Verify options gt Clouds Backup to a single file Backup to several files Split by size 2 GB Split by database Note backup_root_folder can be configured in the Server side Components Properties dialog Backup folder Specify backup destination directory For your convenience backup_root_folder and server tags are provided The directory which the backup_root_folder tag stands for is co
288. stered in the Administration Console click the Show All button E License Manager c l amp h x A aschel sqlexpress Activate Trial key Pro Trial period 16 days left Maintenance end date P doom_server tserv2005 Activate Trial key Pro Trial period has expired Maintenance end date A ka Activate 45A8G IVYV5 OUGTB USOE2 IFPUK ODVSE KYMZ2 9LKYK FCYW4 Pro Maintenance end date 18 02 2015 Deactivate EMS Reactivate ka sqlexpress Activate SREST E9TB9 4WSTC EJ23Y DVTNO CDWQY XWIDX D78IW GAINH Pro Maintenance end date 01 02 2014 Deactivate EMS Reactivate Maintenance period has expired Show All Reactivate All To learn more about license information please visit your Member Account Close License Manager includes the following registration information for every server Instance name e License key License type e Customer name e Maintenance end date Before reactivating license information in the EMS SQL Backup Console you need to proceed to the Members Area and renew maintenance for this license key To reactivate automatically all licenses on all instances click the Reactivate All button License reactivation is performed online To set connection parameters proceed to the Proxy tab of the Options dialog To reactivate license key on a single instance click the Reactivate button located on the right side of the section with a corresponding server information 1999 2015 EMS Database Management So
289. sword SESKEESEEESE Note that the specified account must be of a system administrator role These credentials will be used as SQL Server connection parameters for server side components Help lt Back Next gt Update Windows account for EMS SQL Backup Service Log On Local System account NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM Select this option to use the LocalSystem Windows account as the Service Log On account This account This option allows using specified system account to run the EMS SQL Backup Service Note that the complete name lt domain_name user_name gt of the User must be given Note EMS SQL Backup Service is common for all instances on the server Therefore changes of Windows account on one instance will be applied on all other instances SQL Server login for EMS SQL Backup Service 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 22 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Specify the SQL Server login for EMS SQL Backup Service to connect to the server Afterwards it can be edited using the Server side components Properties dialog Note The specified login must be a member of the system administrator role Windows authentication Select this option to connect to the SQL Server through the Windows user account that is specified in the Windows account for EMS SQL Backup Service Log On Note If the Windows login for the specified Windows user account does not exist on the SQL Server i
290. system are listed here Under the combobox the time zone set on the machine with the running Administration Console is displayed Note After changing the Home time zone value all policies scheduled on the basis of the home time zone will be redeployed according to the newly set time zone Encrypt configuration data If this option is ON the configuration data is encrypted The password is prompted on program launch when configuration information is loaded Password Set password that is used for configuration encryption Confirm password 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 383 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Confirm the password specified as an encryption password above 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd sm EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 8 2 2 Data refreshing Data refreshing tab allows customizing some program settings E Options Select a page Server refresh interval sec 30 amp Security lel a a a Log view depth days 7 4 Cloud Connections Launches records per page 100 w Proxy Server refresh interval sec Set the interval in seconds for refresh of servers at the Servers tab Log view depth days Set the limit of days for displaying server history and Launches Launches records per page Specify the number of records that is loaded at once in the Launches section
291. t launch time for backup database task execution then press the OK button 7 complete all steps of the policy wizard 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd ss EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 5 Setup uploading backup files to different storage locations Network folders FTP SFTP Clouds EMS SQL Backup provides the possibility to save backup files not only in the standard backup folder but also upload their copies to different external storages If you want to configure uploading of backup files to different storages perform the following actions 1 Open the Options dialog and proceed to the Cloud Connections tab 2 Click the Create new connection button and select the connection type in the opened dialog SMB CIFS ETP Amazon S3 Cloud Secure FTP Microsoft Azure 3 Depending on the type selected the relevant dialog for configuring connection properties appears 4 After all connection properties are set click the OK button The specified connection appears in the list of Cloud connections 5 After that on configuring backup operation proceed to the Specifying cloud connections step of the wizard and click the Add existing connection button 6 Select the connection from the list You can add as many connections as you need 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 44 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 6 Create a policy based on predefined templates
292. t None gt LargeDB lt None gt orphaned lt None gt TEST lt None gt Tete So ves lt None gt xtraLargeDB lt Createnew gt AdventureWorks Data folder C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 11 MSSQLSERVER MSSQL DATA Log folder C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 11 MSSQLSERVER MSSQL DATA fs lt Back Next gt Finish Source server Select the server where the database that you want to back up to another server is located Destination server Select the server where backup files are shipped to from the drop down list Set the database pairs in the grid The full database backups are performed on the source server and restored on the destination server If the destination database does not exist you can select lt Create new gt item in the Destination DB column and specify its name in the New database column Creating the databases is performed by creating a full backup of the source database and its further restoring Data folder Specify the path for data MDF files for the newly created database Log folder 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 25 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Specify the path for data LDF files for the newly created database Note When creating a template no databases can be selected at this step Please proceed to the next steps to set default template options Databases can be selected on applying t
293. t Solutions Ltd 351 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 9 Database Parameters Logger Database Parameters Logger step editor provides the same set of options as Database Parameters Logger wizard The following pages are available in this dialog Name_and description General Selection See also Backup database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SOL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Shrink Database Reorganize Indices Update Statistics Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 352 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 9 1 Name and description This page allows you to view edit the step name and description Database Parameters Logger step 1 Task name Use this field to name the step Description This field allows you to define step description 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 353 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 9 2 General At this page you can edit general options of Database Parameters Logger step a Database Parameters Logger step editor Database Parameters Logger step 1 x Select a page Name amp description Name crip Ee E No backup E F Last full backup E a V Last log backup E Index fragmentation E Integrity check V Transaction log F Data file
294. t is being restored f 100 80 E MSSQL MSSQL 1 EE MSSQL10 SQL2008 EC MSSQL Backup amp Binn DATA FILESTREAM1 ftcatalog1 FULLTEXT REST AdventureWorks_Data mdf AdventureWorks_Data_log LDF LA C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL master mdf x ce Hp Click the Next button to proceed to the Specifying restoring options step of the wizard lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 221 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 2 4 Specifying restore options At this step you need to set recovery options and options for transaction log restore Recovery options This group of options allows you to specify the recovery options to be applied to the restore operation Recovery rollbacks all uncommitted transactions This option specifies that the restore operation rolls back any uncommitted transactions After the recovery process the database is ready for use No recovery leaves the database in the restoring state This option specifies that the restore operation does not roll back any uncommitted transactions NB When this option is selected the database is not usable in this intermediate non recovered state When used with a file or filegroup restore operation this option forces the database to remain in the restoring state after the restore operation Thi
295. t job on the server A job is a specified set of operations performed sequentially by SQL Server Agent A job can perform a wide range of activities including running Transact SQL scripts command line applications Microsoft ActiveX scripts Integration Services packages Analysis Services commands and queries or Replication tasks Jobs can run repetitive or scheduled tasks and they can automatically notify operators of job status by generating alerts Before using SQL Server jobs make sure that the SQL Server Agent service is running Note The status of this step execution shows whether a job has been launched or failed to launch and not the result of job execution To launch the job immediately select Al Quick Maintenance Actions Mi Execute SQL Server Agent job popup menu item in the Servers tab To perform scheduled execution of SQL Server Agent job on regular basis you need to include this task into Policy 1 At Step 2 of the Create Policy wizard click Create new step button and select Execute SQL Server Agent job type 2 Also you can create a new Step Template for further use selecting Execute SQL Server Agent job step at the Templates tab Steps of the Execute SQL Server Agent job wizard Naming template Selecting job Performing operation See also Backup Database Restore Database Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Shrink Database Update Statistics Database
296. t of iasks 2588 ne Ten EN ES EEEE 126 Defining notification Options nn iisisianannrnrnnnnnnnnenrnenesnesnesnesneenenneenrenneneneneenenes 128 Creating Policy mniinannrnnnnannennnrnrnenesnesnesnesnesnesnnanennanaaneeneeneeneeneennenneneane rennes 130 22 6 1 LT PACE 1 Le ERP AREAS EE EE veceeondseszecaneveucunctecvucaudvessstdsuexteaneversendes 131 Name and description irnnnnnnnnnenenrnneeneenennennennennnnesnasnesneenneneeneane ane annaaneaneanennnee 132 GO MO FAM fea re E E E T 134 NOTIFICATION oon ssncciccistiiwcsnicicdcesadescennssdsndaecaudeusssesedeuadedadvudvndeauvaav sai ussisasdensuvadnetaiueisdsuidsvanbinsnisintessusnednbuseiucdiesuatuda 136 Maintenance plan conversion is snnrsrrnennneennneneenennnneenennnneeneennnne 137 a a aa eaae aaee EE E EEE AEE EE ananannannnranreonsnneenunntndennentea sean A ete E end ent atu ani taste nnenden anus 138 Selecting Maintenance plan to Convert to POliCy iiinnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenenene 139 Performing conyversioN iiine a aaaea eaaa ae ae aan aa aeaaaee aeaee Aaaa aaa iaaea aa 140 Operation EXECULION mimnannrnnnnannnnenennnannnnesnesnesneeneenesnn Aane a p ESE CE eO EEST AEE aan Aeaee 141 Exe E policy A T E T E A E E E TTE 142 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 5 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Part V Part VI Part VII Poley Statuses 22225 ccs Reis nt AAEE ATAARE IAEE rat n une nes ne nt me ens see nee 143 Policy Sync
297. t only system objects should be selected All user Select this option to select user objects only By mask This option allows defining objects selection by mask Use for a set of any characters and for any single character in the object name 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 350 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual By list This option allows you to select objects manually If you are creating a step template then you can add a database to the list by using the button or Ins key Note The server is selected on applying the Step Template in Policy When you are editing a step on creating a policy from template then if the database s table s view s defined on the Selecting objects step are missed on the selected server the list of database s table s view s will be the following Databases By List V These tables Objects ayust Me l account Tables and Views E These databases lt CCE aw E master G model lt m G msdb These views AdventureWorks i G AdventureWorks_20100419 G DemoDB LargeDB f new_db S Click the Clean Mismatches button to delete the missed database s table s view s from the list for the policy cannot be executed for them 1999 2015 EMS Database Managemen
298. t time in seconds for EMS SQL Backup to connect to server SQL Server Agent info shows the current state of the agent on the selected instance Show Debug Info Check this option to display debug information in server logs Email settings 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 100 3 8 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Email settings At this tab you can set email setting that are used for sending policies notifications by email If the following settings are not set email notifications cannot be sent A Server side Components Properties E Select a page ml V Send notifications by Email SQL Server connection info a om Log storage settings SMTP server mail Backup settings Port 25 2 Login tio Password hr Send from tio ems ru Test address tio ems ru Test W Send notifications by Email Check this option to enable email sending for the service Email service settings SMTP server Type the name of SMTP server to be used for sending emails Port Specify SMTP port for the mail agent Login Input the login for access to the mail agent Password Input the password for access to the mail agent Send from Specify the email address that will be displayed as a Sender address in the notification email 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 101 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual
299. t will be created and added to the sysadmin server role Note If you have selected the Local System Windows account as Service Log On and Windows authentication make sure that the NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM login exists on the SQL Server and is a member of the sysadmin role SQL Server authentication EMS SQL Backup identifies user by his server login and password Login and password management is accomplished by Login Manager If Server authentication is selected as the authentication type you should provide authorization settings User and Password Analyzing them a system determines information and therefore object access permissions lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 3 44 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start the installation process Ee Installation wizard Update server side components on tio sql2014 x Summary Step 4 of 4 Verify the choices made in the wizard Options SQL Server name tio sql2014 Host name tio Resource name ADMINS Action type Update User sa Password XXXXXXEXLELEXEX Service account LocalSystem You can Verify the choices made in wizard in the corresponding area and click the Update Remove button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Dat
300. tabases mainten DB integrity doom_server tser 10 02 2014 10 02 201 Success DO _ 9 Small or middle sized OLTP Backup tran ka 10 02 2014 10 02 201 Aborted 8 System databases mainten DB integrity ka 10 02 2014 10 02 201 Success 7 Small or middle sized OLTP Backup tran ka 10 02 2014 10 02 201 Success 6 Small or middle sized OLTP Differential ka 10 02 2014 10 02 201 Success 5 Small or middle sized OLTP Daily backu ka 10 02 2014 10 02 201 Success 4 Small or middle sized OLTP Update DBs ka 10 02 2014 10 02 201 Success 3 Small or middle sized OLTP Reorganize ka 10 02 2014 10 02 201 Success 2 Small or middle sized OLTP Shrink DB o ka 10 02 2014 10 02 201 Success 1 Small or middle sized OI TP DR intenritv ka 10 07 2914 10 07 2011 Success Task Details Step Backup system DB started 10 02 2014 17 10 01 finished 10 02 2014 17 10 02 a Result success a Details Position 1 Database master Backup type Full Provider EMS SQL Backup Instance TSERV2005 Date and time of creation 10 02 2014 17 10 01 Duration 00 00 00 fe Processes 1 2 Refresh Refreshes the Activities tab You can also use F5 key for this action Stop task Interrupts task execution Show task history Opens the Server History viewer for the selected instance 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 187 EMS SQ
301. tatus that informs you about successful or failed policy executions After reviewing the errors you can ignore them or re execute the task To manage policy status and process of execution go to Servers and Activities tabs E EMS SQL Backup Administration Console Collo m Loa Servers Policies Templates Activities Policies System databases maintenance 2 od 5 nl a usaletr alE x B Name Policy Tasks Policy Servers System databases maintenance gt an y check 5 Typical data warehouse mainter 238 Create New Policy Typical small sized database ma 4 Create Policy from Template tem DB integrity check a3 Edit Policy les pgp Delete Policy night Q Show History ink system DB TE Cocal sal20 14cs E tio sqi2014 2g Schedules Last Sunday of month Ele Backup DB G A Steps E A Backup system DB ocal sql2014cs E tio sqi2014 Qa Schedules 3 Daily night Name System databases maintenance E Task Description For the system databases master mode Name Shrink DB Scheduled in Local server time Description Modified 10 06 2015 12 53 E Steps Shrink system DB Shrinks the size of the data files in the system database E Schedules _ S R z Last Sunday of month La Create Template from Policy Processes 0 Home time 12 54 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 115 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual To
302. te T SOL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Shrink Database Reorganize Indices Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Transaction Log Shipping Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd sos EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 1 1 Name and description This page allows you to view edit Backup database step name and description STATE er ge TE nd Ep TO ckup Database step editor Backup syste DB Select a page Name Backup system DB General Description Backs up system databases TS Selection E SQL Backup settings Backup file options Verify options Clouds Name Use this field to name the step Description This field allows you to define step description 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 304 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 1 2 General This page allows you to view a backup provider selected G Backup Database step editor Backup system DB Ex Select a page ps Backup Provider Name amp description qj General ti itis EMS SQL Backup T Selection Easy to use adjustable with enhanced options Allows multiple databases backup compression and encryption of backup files amp SQL Backup settings f Backup file options SQL Server a Backup is provided by native SQL Server means Only single database can be backed up
303. ted as a Backup provider then you can define the path and name of the specific backup File to be deleted Extension Specify the custom extension for backup or report files if it differs from the default Enable Include subfolders Y Include first level subfolders option if you need to clean up all sub folders of the specified folder File type Use this drop down list to specify the the type of files to be deleted e Backups backup files e Reports text reports of previously run maintenance plans Note This drop down list is available if the MS SQL Server has been selected as a Provider Cloud storage 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd se EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Eo Define items to clear Location Server Cloud storage All files by mask bkp B Add existing connection Create new connection backupsst Ee Delete s3 backupsstest est Standard Here you need to specify the cloud storage where you want to delete backup files You can create a new connection or add an existing one On adding an existing connection you will be offered to choose among connections specified in Cloud Connections tab of the Options dialog If you create a new connection then after specifying its properties you will be offered to save it so this connection will be available in Cloud Connections To change connection parameters click on its name Depending on connec
304. tegrity check made before this point will be added to log v Transaction log Enable this option to log the list of databases with transaction log free space below the specified limit Free space is less than This option defines transaction log free space limit Log includes list of databases with amount of free space less than this limit Log file is larger than This option adds log file size condition List of databases which transaction log file is larger than the specified limit will be included to log v Data file This option indicates that log should include databases with data file free space below the specified limit Free space is less than Use this option to define the data file free space limit Data file is larger than Use this option to define data file size condition Databases which data file is above this limit will be added to log lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 275 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 10 4 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start logging database parameters Click Finish to create step item Step 4 of 4 Verify the choices made in the wizard Step Name Kind Database selection ka Select Databases AdventureWorks doom_server tserv2005 Select Databases AdventureWorks DemoDB LargeDB Data
305. text menu item 3 after a while the default mail client installed on your computer will be opened with newly created letter having bug report files attached to it 4 in the generated e mail describe the steps to reproduce the occurred bug and send the letter If due to some reasons the e mail creation failed or the report sending was cancelled the following dialog appears ES SQL Backup Bug report via e mail Exa The bug report sending was cancelled A x You can create bug report e mail manually 1 sqlangelreports sqlmanager net dick me Copy to dipboard 2 Save report file Save and open folder 3 Attach saved report file to e mail 4 Describe your problem and share your experience 5 Thank you Follow the given instructions to create bug report e mail manually 1 click the mailto link sqlangelreports sqlmanager net to open mail client or in case no client has been opened copy the address by clicking the Copy to clipboard button and create e mail in a preferable client 2 click the Save and open folder button and define the directory where the bug report file should be saved after the file is saved the defined directory will be opened automatically 3 attach the saved file to the created e mail 4 describe the steps to reproduce the occurred bug and send the letter 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd se EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9
306. the EMS SQL Backup Console Registering EMS SQL Backup means purchasing and further activation of a received License Key for every instance you want to work with Note that for working with Enterprise and BI versions of SQL Server you need to activate the EMS SQL Backup PRO license Having installed the client and server side parts of EMS SQL Backup you need to activate the server side part of EMS SQL Backup To get an activation code please do the following 1 Run EMS SQL Backup 2 Connect to SQL Server 3 Right click this server in the server list and select Activate license 4 Follow the steps in the Wizard To remove a license from an instance use the Deactivate License Wizard After that you will be able to activate this license key on another SQL Server instance License activation License deactivation See also Purchasing 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 9 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 5 1 License activation To start working with your servers you need to activate EMS SQL Backup License for each instance It is assumed that you have already purchased a product license and that you have the license information available If you cannot find license information please visit your Member Account https secure sqimanager net member subscribe The activation operation is performed by means of the License Activation Wizard To activate your newly purchased licens
307. the policy being created Policy is a set of schedule s and tasks each containing at least one step ja Policy wizard Policy 2 Define a set of service tasks steps and corresponding schedules Step 2 of 4 gt Tasks 42 Sunday DB backup o Steps Backup DB Er Schedules H Sunday night at 4 o clock ES Weekdays differential DB backup gt Steps Differential backup DB ES Schedules 6 days of week a w Un LP B Le ee lt Back Next gt Finish Ml create New Use this button Ins key or the Add button in the task step schedule header to create a new object I create New from Template If you create a task step schedule from a template you need to pick a template for this object in the opened dialog Edit You can use this button or click the Edit button in the object header to edit the object Delete Click this button or the Delete button in the object header to remove it from the list 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 127 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual The Delete key can be used as well Copy to Templates Press this button to create a template with the same options as the selected object Use a and x buttons to reorder Tasks Steps and Schedules The order of objects is important for Steps they are executed in the set order starting from the top Use the following buttons for quick co
308. the restore process lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 24 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 2 5 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start the operation Click Run to start operation Step 5 of 5 Verify the choices made in the wizard Step Name Quick Restore Database step Database selection ka Select Databases AdventureWorks Options Replace Yes Recovery Recovery Perform checksum No Continue on error No Transaction log all records of transaction log before Stop at time 02 04 2014 00 00 00 Verify only No Check orphaned users Yes Drop orphaned users No Backups C Backups MSSQLSER VER MSSQLSERVER_AdventureWorks C Backups MSSQLSER VER MSSQLSERVER_AdventureWorks C Backups MSSQLSER VER MSSQLSERVER_AdventureWorks Database files C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 1 MSSQL DAT C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 1 MSSQL DAT Help Next gt Run Cancel After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Run button to complete the operation lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 225 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 3 Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute SQL Server Agent job step allows you to execute an SQL Server Agen
309. tion If the New database or Overwrite option has been selected as a Destination database at Step 2 performing of the operation consists of 2 steps 1 Transferring of the full backup 2 Transferring of transaction log lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd It is executed once on wizard finish 22 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 13 Database Shipping Database Shipping step allows you to create full backups on the source server ship them to the destination server via a shared folder and restore on the destination server To perform database shipping step you must have at least two SQL Server instances version of destination server cannot be lower than the source server version both servers must have access to the shared folder To launch the database shipping immediately select Quick Maintenance Actions nS Database shipping popup menu item in the Servers tab To perform scheduled database shipping on a regular basis you need to include this task into Policy 1 At Step 2 of the Create Policy wizard click Create new step button and select Database Shipping step type 2 Also you can create a new Step Template for further use selecting Database Shipping step at the Templates tab Steps of the Database Shipping wizard Naming step Specify database pairs Specify backup options Specify folders and recovery options Viewing summary information See also
310. tion type the relevant dialog for configuring connection settings will be opened All files by mask In this field you can specify the mask for the file names to be deleted 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd ses EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 211 Transaction Log Shipping Transaction Log Shipping step editor provides the same set of options as Transaction Log Shipping wizard The following pages are available in this dialog Name and description General Selection See also Backup database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SQL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Shrink Database Reorganize Indices Update Statistics Database Parameters Logger Maintenance Cleanup Database Shipping 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd sa EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 11 1 Name and description This page allows you to view edit the step name and description Name Use this field to name the step Description This field allows you to define step description 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 365 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 11 2 General This page is used to define options for log shipping step Log Shipping step editor
311. tiple servers using the user friendly GUI console e A high performance multi threaded backup e Working with Enterprise and BI versions of SQL Server and more Scroll to top See also What s new 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 7 EMS SQL Backup FAQ Please read this page attentively if you have questions about EMS SQL Backup Table of contents e What versions of SQL Server does EMS SQL Backup support e Must EMS SQL Backup be installed on each server which I want to work with e I have 5 SQL Servers 2 of which have two SQL Server instances running how many licenses for EMS SOL Backup do I need to purchase How does EMS SOL Backup reduce backup size Does the backup compression depend on SQL Server version or edition How much is a backup file size reduced and what does it depend on Can I restore a backup file of EMS SQL Backup on SQL Server with no EMS SQL Backup components installed What are the reasons for reduction of time required for backup and recovery e Does EMS SQL Backup use undocumented features of SQL Server e Can EMS SQL Backup perform a standard backup suitable for recovery on SQL Server without using EMS SQL Backup e Does EMS SQL Backup support log shipping e I have servers in different time zones At what time zone will tasks be launched e What is the advantage of using the Policy Engine of EMS SQL Backup compared to
312. tistics only Options Full scan Sample 10 Percent x Resample No recompute All existing statistics Select this option if you need to update all statistics Column statistics only Use this option to update column statistics only Index statistics only This option indicates that only index statistics will be updated Full scan Specifies that all rows in table or view should be read to gather the statistics This option provides the same behavior as Sample 100 Percent Sample Specifies the percentage of the table or indexed view or the number of rows to sample when collecting statistics for larger tables or views Resample Option specifies that statistics will be gathered using an inherited sampling ratio for all existing statistics including indexes If the sampling ratio results in too few rows being 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd se EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual sampled SQL Server automatically corrects the sampling based on the number of existing rows in the table or view v No recompute Disable the option to recompute statistics that become out of date automatically 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd s EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 2 8 3 Selection This page allows you to edit object selection to update statistics
313. to select both system and user objects All system This option indicates that only system objects should be selected All user Select this option to select user objects only 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 272 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual By mask This option allows defining objects selection by mask Use for a set of any characters and for any single character in the object name By list This option allows you to select objects manually If you are creating a step in a policy template then you are able to enter databases manually Databases By List These databases A TestDB 8 AdventureWorks AdventureWorks 1 Use the button or Ins key to define database name After you click the Enter button the database will be added to the list Any database from the list can be edited or x deleted lt lt Previous ste Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 273 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 10 3 Setting conditions This step allows you to define events to be logged L Database Parameters Logger step wizard Database Parameters Logger step 1 l Select required parameters and define options Step 3 of 4 Name V No backup Last full backup Last log backup Index fragmentation Logging conditions Free space is less than 25 tH Log file is larger than 100 mB Hep
314. to select databases manually If you are creating a step in a policy template then you are able to enter databases manually Databases By List These databases A TestDB 8 AdventureWorks AdventureWorks 1 Enter Cancel Use the button or Ins key to define database name After you click the Enter button the database will be added to the list Any database from the list can be edited or x deleted lt lt Previous ste Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 245 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 6 3 Setting options This step of the wizard allows you to customize database integrity check Database Integrity Check step wizard Database Integrity Check step 1 gt l Define integrity check options Step 3 of 4 v Indude Indices Limited checking options Exdusive access options Physical Only Snapshot Data Purity Lock Table All Error Messages No Info Messages Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel W Include Indices The option indicates that indices are included in database integrity check WI Limited Checking Use this option if you need to restrict database integrity check with Physical Only or Data Purity conditions Physical Only option PHYSICAL_ONLY limits the checking operation to the integrity of the physical structure of the page and record headers the physical structure of B t
315. to start the operation Step 4 of 4 Verify the information that you ve provided to the wizard To make corrections click the Back button otherwise click the Finish button to create SQL Backup Policy Policy Name test_policy In different time zones Use local server time Service tasks Cleanup Steps Server hisory deanup Kind History Cleanup step Maintenance Cleanup Kind Maintenance Cleanup step Schedules Monthly Occurs every month on day 1 at 0 00 00 e Schedule will be used starting on 01 03 2014 Backup Steps Backup system databases Kind Backup Database step Schedules Weekly ie Occurs every week on Monday at 0 00 00 De capa Schedule will be used starting on 10 02 2014 Notification options From service of ka to as sglmanager net as You can Verify the choices made in the wizard in the corresponding area and click the Finish button to create the policy lt lt Previous step 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 131 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 4 3 Policy editor The policy is the logical set of maintenance tasks that need to be performed on a database or SQL Server instances at the corresponding time schedules Each task in turn consists of one or more discrete maintenance actions To edit the policy you need to double click the policy at the Policies tab or select the ae Edit Policy item on the toolbar of the Policies tab or from the popup menu Editor tabs Name an
316. ton to complete the activation Renew maintenance manually This option is available if the license key is already activated for prolonging maintenance 1 On the first step of the wizard select the Enter existing license activation code manually option 2 On the second step enter License Activation Code 3 On the last step click the Finish button to complete the activation 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 42 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 4 Schedule backup database task daily If you want a backup database task to be executed daily you need to create a policy with a Backup Database step and a schedule with appropriate parameters In order to do this perform the following operations 1 choose the database in the server explorer and select the Maintenance Policies Create New Policy item of its context menu 2 on the second step of policy wizard select the Steps section and click the Add button 3 in the Select Step dialog select the Backup Database item 4 in the Backup Database step wizard opened configure backup settings after all wizard steps completion the Backup Database step appears in the Steps list 5 select the Schedules section and click the Add button 6 in the opened Schedule editor set the following parameters e Schedule type Recurring from date e Occurs Daily e Recurs every 1 day e Daily frequency Occurs once at e Occurs once a
317. tor privileges on the machine where the SQL Server service is running If you still have this problem then one of the solutions is to disable Remote UAC on the target system It prevents local administrative accounts from accessing ADMIN shared folder and running installation process To disable Remote UAC you need to add an entry in the registry of the target computer e open the registry e navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFT WARE Microsoft Windows CurrentVersion Policies Syste m e create a DWORD value called LocalAccountTokenFilterPolicy e assign this parameter a value of 1 Scroll to top If you still have any questions contact us at our Support Center 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd e EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 1 8 Other EMS Products Quick navigation a g 2 MySQL Microsoft SQL PostgreSQL InterBase Oracle IBM DB2 Tools amp FireBird components MySQL 89 SQL Management Studio for MySQL EMS SQL Management Studio for MySQL is a complete solution for database administration and development SQL Studio unites the must have tools in one powerful and easy to use environment that will make you more productive than ever before SQL Manager for MySQL Simplify and automate your database development process design explore and maintain existing databases build compound SQL query statements manage database user rights and manipulate data in different ways Data Ex
318. tore successful policy status If you have revealed a reason of why a policy did not run or failed after execution you can repair its overall status that means to change erroneous policy statuses Failed Missed Aborted and Warning to Ignored and repeat erroneous tasks if needed This can be done on several ways e Click the Resolve button located under the server status In the dialog appeared all problem tasks of all policies will be listed You can change erroneous status to Ignored and or execute all problem tasks of all policies In this case overall status of every policy will be changed based on last launches of erroneous tasks Select the erroneous policy in the Policies list and then choose the Resolve the Problem item of its context menu In the opened dialog you will be proposed to change statuses of all erroneous policy tasks to Ignored and or execute all problem tasks of this policy In this case overall status of this policy will be changed based on last launches of its erroneous tasks Select the erroneous policy task in the Policies list and then choose the Resolve the Problem item of its context menu In the opened dialog you will be proposed to change status of this erroneous policy task to Ignored and or repeat its execution In this case overall status of this policy will be changed based on a last launch of this erroneous task Using a context menu of an erroneous task in the Launches list you can change to Ignored Ignore
319. ture of your databases Move changes on your development database to production with ease pe DB Extract for SQL Server Create database backups in the form of SQL scripts save your database structure and table data as a whole or partially SQL Query for SQL Server Analyze and retrieve your data build your queries visually work with query plans build charts based on retrieved data quickly and more amp Data Comparer for SQL Server Compare and synchronize the contents of your databases Automate your data migrations from development to production database Scroll to top PostgreSQL 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd a EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual s9 SQL Management Studio for PostgreSQL EMS SQL Management Studio for PostgreSQL is a complete solution for database administration and development SQL Studio unites the must have tools in one powerful and easy to use environment that will make you more productive than ever before SQL Manager for PostgreSQL Simplify and automate your database development process design explore and maintain existing databases build compound SQL query statements manage database user rights and manipulate data in different ways Data Export for PostgreSQL Export your data to any of 20 most popular data formats including MS Access MS Excel MS Word PDF HTML and more Data Import for PostgreSQL Import your data from MS Access MS
320. ty ka 08 02 2014 19 30 00 ka 08 02 2014 19 10 00 Success BackupDB ka 08 02 2014 19 00 00 Success DB integrity ka l 4 a 4 x F1 Time lt 09 02 2014 0 00 00 And Server Flag control enables disables filtering The arrow down button opens the list containing recently applied filters To open current filter expression in the Filter Builder press the Edit Filter button The Close button disables panel and cancels filtering 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 158 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 Templates This chapter describes the way you can manage policy service task and schedule templates EMS SQL Backup has a set of standard preset templates for easy creation of policies and their elements You can create your own policy templates or widen the template library on the basis of already created objects To activate the template management section switch to the Templates tab Policy templates Task templates Step templates Schedule template ES EMS SQL Backup Administration Console th Servers Policies Templates Activities Templates Policy Templates s N ipti View Deecrp on 4 Preset templates Templates provided by EMS Policy Templates System databases maintenance For the system databases master model and msdb l Task Templates h Typical data warehouse maintenance For small and medium sized d
321. unch 4 Service task wizard Service task 1 25 Define a schedule s for service task Step 3 of 4 Schedules to be used Name oR gt Saturday night at 1 o dock a Sa Description Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel EF Create new schedule Clicking this button opens the Schedule Editor allowing you to create a schedule a Create New Schedule from Template Use this button to create schedule from template On pressing this button the Item selection dialog is opened allowing you to select any of the available templates and create a schedule based on its settings If you select several schedule templates the corresponding number of schedules will be created 3 Edit Schedule This button opens selected schedule for editing amp Delete Schedule Click this button to remove selected schedule from the list Ga Copy step to templates Use this button to create a template based on the selected schedule You can view each step Description if any in the corresponding field lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 170 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 2 1 4 Creating task At this step of the wizard you can see the summary of all options set at the previous steps Click Finish to start the operation Step 4 of 4 Verify the choices made in the wizard Service task Name Service t
322. undo file name the restore operation stops Set V Kill connections to destination database option ON for forced disconnection of all processes the database We recommend to check it if Overwrite option has been set at Step 2 lt lt Previous step Next step gt gt 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 291 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 12 5 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can perform transaction log shipping Click Finish to create step item Verify the choices made in the wizard Log Shipping step wizard Log Shipping step 1 Step 5 of 5 Options Source server Destination server Network share Restore from Data folder for new Logs folder for new Kill connections to destination database Database pairs Pair 1 Backup options Backup dir Block size KB Max thread count Compression level Encryption type Encryption password Restore options Recovery doom_server tserv2005 olivia ka shared C Backups C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 11 MSSQLSERVER MSSQL DATA C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 11 MSSQLSERVER MSSQL DATA Yes TestDB to new TestDB backup_root_folder server 4096 2 2 Rijndael seeeeeeeees NORECOVERY After verifying the choices made in the wizard click the Finish button to complete the opera
323. up cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeesesseeeseesseeeeeesseneeeees 399 Install server side components without having permissions for remote installation 400 Activate license on SQL Server instance cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaneeeesees 401 Schedule backup database task daily ss sssssssseernseeneenss 402 Setup uploading backup files to different storage locations Network folders FTP SFTP Clouds Create a policy based on predefined templates nenene nnna 404 Configure transaction log shipping sn 405 Monitor server productivity counters ss sssssnnrennneenennnnenneennsennennnnes 406 Add database server to an existing policy sneenss 407 Create a policy rapidly on several srvers databases 408 Transfer policy tasks to another set of databases servers 409 Reveal a reason of a failed policy execution ss ssssnnneneennnenenennnne 410 Restore successful policy status snssssnnnsennnnnneeneennneeenennnne 411 Convert SQL Server maintenance plan to SQL Backup Policy ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 412 Manage templates effectively ccceeesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeaeeeseenaeeess 413 Configure policy notifications cceee
324. updating and removing server side components locally on a server 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd o EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 9 3 Activate license on SQL Server instance License activation for SQL Server instance is performed by means of License activation wizard Use the Activate license server context menu item to launch this wizard There are four methods of activating license on SQL Server instance e online activation e web site activation e manual re activation Online activation 1 On the first step of the wizard select the Activate EMS SQL Backup License online option 2 On the second step of the wizard enter License Key It can be copied from the Members Area or from the e mail that is received after license purchasing 3 On the last step click the Finish button to complete the activation Web site activation 1 On the first step of the wizard select the Activate EMS SQL Backup License through our website option 2 Register in the Members Area at https secure sglmanager net login and open My Registered Products section 3 Expand key list for desired product and choose the Activate License action 4 Enter automatically generated SQL Server instance ID on the second step into a web form and generate the activation code 5 Copy the generated activation code in the License Activation Code field on the third step 6 On the last step click the Finish but
325. velopment using a variety of available tools easily and quickly When the program is launched for the first time the Configuration dialog is prompted where you need to set the destination for storing EMS SQL Backup settings To work with the program you need to register the servers first and install server side components on each of them Servers can be registered in Groups or Solutions folders Groups are used to organize servers by some specific criteria for example location whereas Solutions unite servers or databases to be included into one Policy Enjoy your work with EMS SQL Backup E amp EMS SQL Backup Administration Console hy Servers Policies Templates Activities Servers Groups rE 48 Servers amp Groups Count Total 0 Active 0 Failed 0 amp Solutions Register server Policies Name Server Next Launch Status Shortcuts Troubled servers Launches Filter Off Name Planned Start Started Finished Status Message S Processes 0 See also Servers Policies Templates Activities Maintenance Actions Options 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 1 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual EMS SQL Backup overview EMS SQL Backup consists of two core units SQL Administration Console and Server side components SQL Administration Console is launched at the client machine whereas Server side components are installed on the server where SQL
326. w connection then after specifying its properties you will be offered to save it so this connection will be available in Cloud Connections To change connection parameters click on its name Depending on connection type the relevant dialog for configuring connection settings will be opened Note If the backup file with the specified name already exists in the storage then it will not be replaced and the upload will be failed 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 2 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual Do not store backup copies locally Check this option to delete backup files from your local disk after successful upload to the cloud storage Note Backup files will not be deleted from the local disk if the upload to at least one specified cloud fails 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 210 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 7 1 1 10 Performing operation This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been set and you can start the operation Click Finish to create step item Verify the choices made in the wizard Step 8 of 8 Database selection doom_server tserv2005 Select Databases DemoDB LargeDB AdventureWorks Options Backup provider Backup folder File name Backup type Truncate inactive log records Verify backup Perform checksum Continue on error Copy only Compression level Encryption type
327. xport Eig Export Template cf Import cf Import Template C Clone C Clone Template S Processes 0 You can manage task templates using the buttons on the Toolbars or popup menu Add New Template Ctri Insert launches the wizard for creating a new task template 2 Edit Template opens the task template editor Delete Template Ctr Delete removes the template E Export Template cf Import Template CH Clone Template create a copy of the selected template How to create a task based on the template When you are prompted to create a task on policy creation click the A create New from Template button and select the template or several templates at once from the list 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 164 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual See also Policy templates Step templates Step templates 1999 2015 EMS Database Management Solutions Ltd 165 EMS SQL Backup Administration console User manual 5 2 1 Create task wizard This wizard will guide you through creating a task template that EMS SQL Backup can run on a regular basis Task in EMS SQL Backup is a set of scheduled steps to be performed on the server s or database s You can schedule routine database administration steps Backup Database Execute SQL Server Agent job Execute T SOL statement History Cleanup Database Integrity Check Reorganize Indices Shrink Databas
328. ypt backup Encryption Password Set password that is used for backup encryption Confirm password Confirm the password specified as an encryption password above Encryption Type Select the encryption algorithm Network shared folder Specify the backup shared folder for copying transaction log backups of the source database Both source and destination servers should have access to this folder otherwise log shipping cannot be performed Click the Check button to make sure that the folder is accessible by both servers Destination folder Specify the destination server folder where backups will be shipped to This folder is set relatively to the destination server Recovery options This group of options allows you to specify the recovery options to be applied to the restore operation The destination database may be in either the recovering or standby state which leaves the database available for limited read only access No recovery leaves database in the restoring state This option specifies that the restore operation does not roll back any uncommitted transactions NB When this option is selected the database is not usable in this intermediate non recovered state When used with a file or filegroup restore operation this option forces the database to remain in the restoring state after the restore operation This is useful in either of the following situations e a restore script is being run and the log is always being a

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LEA ESTE INSTRUCTIVO ANTES DE USARSE MANUAL  取扱説明書  Download(AK60)    96 Manual de instrucciones ADMR 17.2 Esquemas  STR-DE345 - hifi  Rapport d`activité 2011 de la Mission Locale  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file